JP2017099647A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine employing a concept of creating a game progress state favorable to a player such that further innovative game properties are realized.SOLUTION: The game machine has a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B that are different in tendency of an open mode of an electric accessory as a game state. In the time-saving game state A, the game progresses with pattern variation on a first main game side. In the time-saving game state B, the game progresses with pattern variation on a second main game side.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this manner, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

JP-A-61-255680 JP 2005-296613 A JP 2005-152440 A JP 2007-313212 A

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start opening BA12) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) A variable member A (for example, the first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start start) A variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that changes toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening entrance (for example, the first opening entrance C22). A sorting member (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced in the second mode;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variable manner, First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) displays the second main game identification information variably, Second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period has elapsed,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a period in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. One or a plurality of operations of displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state within a certain displacement drive period. Easy-entry game determination execution means for executing easy-to-enter ball games to be performed once,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination than the normal gaming state). The object B11d) has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state;
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
The sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be able to displace when triggered by the easy-to-enter ball game,
When the easy entry game is executed, the sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
Expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed when the information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is different from the expected value.
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game and is in the first specific game state, a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in the second specific game state after the end of the special game, At least,
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and when the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed, the second specified The ratio of the game state is determined by the high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be smaller than the proportion of being in the second specific gaming state.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in the gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 26 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the first main game reservation prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of second main game reservation prefetch determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 40 is an operation diagram relating to an open entrance in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 41 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the promotion count control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the sorting member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first non-electrical accessory drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the second non-electrical accessory drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 from the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is an operation diagram related to the sorting member unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 from the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 from the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 from the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 from the third embodiment.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decorative pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Estimated average execution time of easy-to-play games per unit time” is assumed to be a situation in which there is a constant change in the auxiliary game symbol (for example, there is always a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the start port. In terms of internal processing, in other words, for example, When a variable member is attached to the start port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function activated / non-actuated state), the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member is won Probability level (so-called ordinary figure high probability state / low probability state), normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol), which is the trigger for opening the variable member, the length of change time (so-called usual figure fluctuation reduction function) Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the variation display period of identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the variation display period for each variation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the actual measurement value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are multiple types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (the sum of “selection probability × variable display period”). If there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type The variable display period itself is (that is, includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability In other words, it is possible to supplement the fact that the meaning of this wording is to be used as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that can be experienced by the player. As a method of realizing different "average values", the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are changed, or even if the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing this, but it is not limited to any method). “The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "At least having a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, the state transition of “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” is made according to the number of times of display of the identification information. Including those that can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured as “first variation period state” <“second variation period state” <“third variation period state”, It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the reverse state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it becomes suitable when used in combination with the probability variation gaming state that continues until the next jackpot + the easy-to-open-chuo state (the next jackpot is not obtained despite the situation where the next jackpot occurrence is definite) As the situation continues, the speed of progress of the game increases, so there is a case where it is possible to dispel the feeling of fatigue during so-called humming. Further, as a feature of each state, in the “first variation period state”, the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is “ In the “third variation period state”, which is smaller than the difference in the “second variation period state”, the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of losing and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting In addition to the difference being smaller than that in the “second variation period state”, the identification information variation display period is likely to be relatively long compared to the “first variation period state” (particularly in the event of a loss) In other words, in the “second variation period state”, the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively long compared to other states. (I.e., the fluctuation display period for short fluctuations where the loss is definitive and the fluctuation display period for medium fluctuations suggesting a hit are not selected (or difficult to select), but the fluctuations in reach fluctuations (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that only the display period is selected (or is easily selected)}. The “specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game” may be a period from immediately after the end of the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made. It may be a period from the time when one or more symbol changes are made after the execution of the game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within the range, so the aforementioned “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” The specific period may mean the stay period of the “first variation period state” and / or the “second variation period state”. “When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold” means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the hold-up, but there is a possibility that a special game will occur There are no particular limitations on the criteria. More specifically, “winning random number (random number for success / failure lottery)”, “variation mode determination random number” for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, “symbol determination random number” for determining the stop symbol, Random values such as “hit symbol determination random numbers” that determine whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for judgment, and event contents derived from these random values (results of success / failure determination) The length of the variation time, the type of stop symbol, whether or not to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. “Suggesting or notifying the presence of a hold” means, for example, an effect at the time of the on-hold digestion until reaching the hold (a design variation mode of a decorative design, or in conjunction with it) In the case of notification, for example, a display mode of a holding indicator lamp (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of occurrence of the holding Is changed (in that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the sound such as the on-hold sound or BGM is changed at the time of the on-hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the on-hold occurrence Changing the lighting mode of the (frame lamp, etc.), or executing mode of other effects (decoration pattern of the decorative pattern, background effects, etc. performed in conjunction with it) executed at the time of the hold occurrence The To reduction, and the like. The “average value of the variation display period of identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the variation display period for each variation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the actual measurement value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are multiple types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (the sum of “selection probability × variable display period”). If there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type The variable display period itself is (that is, includes both concepts). Further, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of losing, or the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the hit time (including the so-called small hit time), or most It may be a concept limited to only a variable display period with a high selection probability, i.e., the meaning of this wording is that it is used as an index indicating the progress speed of a game that can be experienced by the player. As a method of realizing different “average values of variable display periods of identification information”, candidates for variable display periods and / or selection probabilities are different, or candidates for variable display periods and / or selection probabilities are the same. There are various methods such as different period values when adding a further variable display period, but the method is not limited to any one of them). The “stay stage” is a stage that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect displayed when the stay stage is different {the type of notice effect that can be executed, executed The type of background effect to be obtained, the frequency of execution of the notice effect that can be executed, the frequency of execution of the background effect that can be executed, the frequency of occurrence of reach effects (SP reach effect, development effect, etc.) are different.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In addition, in this example, “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that this is an associated mode. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, the structure applicable to the pachinko game which concerns on this example is shown in FIG.1 and FIG.2. Further, the following concepts can be extracted (listed) from the configurations shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the embodiments described later are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (upper level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be. In addition, the structure which combined the black circle (●) shown in the configurations 1 to 9 in FIGS. 1 and 2 is a more preferable configuration, and the black circle (●) shown in the configurations 1 to 9 is combined with a white circle (◯). The configuration is also suitable. Note that the time-reduced gaming state according to this example may be that the main game short time flag is on, or the auxiliary game short time flag may be on, that is, the time shortened gaming state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, or the non-time-reduced gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated. The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reducing gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to have an auxiliary game starting port, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (1-1)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start opening BA12) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) A variable member A (for example, the first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start start) A variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that changes toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening entrance (for example, the first opening entrance C22). A sorting member (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced in the second mode;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variable manner, First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) displays the second main game identification information variably, Second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period has elapsed,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a period in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. One or a plurality of operations of displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state within a certain displacement drive period. Easy-entry game determination execution means for executing easy-to-enter ball games to be performed once,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination than the normal gaming state). The object B11d) has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state;
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
The sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be able to displace when triggered by the easy-to-enter ball game,
When the easy entry game is executed, the sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
Expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed when the information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is different from the expected value.
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game and is in the first specific game state, a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in the second specific game state after the end of the special game, At least,
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and when the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed, the second specified The ratio of the game state is determined by the high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be smaller than the proportion of being in the second specific gaming state.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (1-2)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start opening BA12) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) A variable member A (for example, the first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start start) A variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that changes toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening entrance (for example, the first opening entrance C22). A sorting member (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced in the second mode;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variable manner, First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) displays the second main game identification information variably, Second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period has elapsed,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a period in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. One or a plurality of operations of displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state within a certain displacement drive period. Easy-entry game determination execution means for executing easy-to-enter ball games to be performed once,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of change display of the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit. Until one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to enter the low probability lottery state,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination than the normal gaming state). The object B11d) has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state;
In the case of a specific gaming state, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one is calculated from when the specific gaming state is entered. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second count is more than the first count,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
The distribution member is configured to be able to be displaced when the easy-to-play game is executed,
When the easy entry game is executed, the sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.
If the special game state is entered after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the time when the special game state is entered. The unit is configured to be in a normal gaming state by being performed the first time,
If the special game state is entered after the end of the special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the time when the special game state is entered. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in a normal gaming state when the one unit is performed a second time.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (1-3)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start opening BA12) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) A variable member A (for example, the first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start start) A variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance is either the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) or the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23). A member to be changed toward the first mode, and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening (for example, the first open pitch C22), and when it is displaced to the second mode, the second mode A sorting member (for example, a sorting member C24) configured to make it easy for a game ball to enter the opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23);
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variable manner, First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) displays the second main game identification information variably, Second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period has elapsed,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a period in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. One or a plurality of operations of displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state within a certain displacement drive period. Easy-entry game determination execution means for executing easy-to-enter ball games to be performed once,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of change display of the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit. Until one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to enter the low probability lottery state,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination than the normal gaming state). The object B11d) has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state;
In the case of a specific gaming state, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one is calculated from when the specific gaming state is entered. Until the unit is played a specific number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled so that it does not enter the normal gaming state,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
The sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be able to displace when triggered by the easy-to-enter ball game,
When the easy entry game is executed, the sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
Expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed when the information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is different from the expected value.
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (1-4)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start opening BA12) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) A variable member A (for example, the first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start start) A variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that changes toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening entrance (for example, the first opening entrance C22). A sorting member (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced in the second mode;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variable manner, First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) displays the second main game identification information variably, Second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period has elapsed,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a period in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. One or a plurality of operations of displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state within a certain displacement drive period. Easy-entry game determination execution means for executing easy-to-enter ball games to be performed once,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of change display of the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit. Until one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to enter the low probability lottery state,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination than the normal gaming state). The object B11d) has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state;
In the case of a specific gaming state, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one is calculated from when the specific gaming state is entered. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second count is more than the first count,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
The sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be able to displace when triggered by the easy-to-enter ball game,
When the easy entry game is executed, the sorting member (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
Expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed when the information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is different from the expected value.
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.
If the special game state is entered after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the time when the special game state is entered. The unit is configured to be in a normal gaming state by being performed the first time,
If the special game state is entered after the end of the special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the time when the special game state is entered. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in a normal gaming state when the one unit is performed a second time.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (1-5)
A game board (eg, game area D30);
A game ball distribution unit (for example, distribution start port unit C50) disposed in an opening formed in a game board (for example, game area D30);
A first main game start port B (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start opening BA12) can enter the game ball or can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start opening BA12) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured such that a game ball cannot enter the main game start opening BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to an open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that is changed toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first opening, and when it is displaced to the second mode, the second release is performed. A sorting member B (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the mouth;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The game ball distribution unit (for example, the distribution start unit C50)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first main game start port A (for example, a first main game start port) provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, a common entrance port C51), which is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter. AA10)
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, the common entrance port C51), which is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter. )When,
The first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) and the second main game start port (for example, the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common ball entrance (for example, the common entrance C51) , A second main game start port B10) that changes toward one of the first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) and the second main game start port. A distribution member A (for example, a start port distribution member C50y) configured to be alternately changed toward a mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10);
A variable member that is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced in the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter the game, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state. A variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd),
The main game department
A first random number is acquired based on a ball entering the first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) or the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start port BA12). First random number acquisition means;
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variable manner, First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two-main game identification information display control means;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period has elapsed,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a period in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. One or a plurality of operations of displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state within a certain displacement drive period. Easy-entry game determination execution means for executing easy-to-enter ball games to be performed once,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination than the normal gaming state). The object B11d) has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state;
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
The distribution member B (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be able to be displaced when the easy-to-enter ball game is executed.
When easy pitching game is executed, the sorting member B (for example, the sorting member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to include an electric accessory (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) at the start opening and other entrances, and as a concept based on the configuration. Is
Pachinko machines related to this concept (2)
Auxiliary game start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance and be compared with a closed state A variable member that is easy to enter and configured so that a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in a predetermined entrance when it is displaced to a closed state,
An auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port,
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
If the determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is winning, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is released from the closed state within a displacement driving period during which the variable member can be displaced. It is a pachinko gaming machine comprising easy-entry game determination execution means for executing easy-entry game that performs the operation of displacing the closed state one or more times after being displaced to the open state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to include a distribution member that distributes game balls to a plurality of entrances, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (3)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that changes toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening entrance (for example, the first opening entrance C22). And a sorting member (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced in the second mode. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to include a plurality of non-electrically-powered objects at the start opening and other entrances.
Pachinko machines related to this concept (4)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start opening BA12) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) A variable member A (for example, the first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start start) The mouth B10) is configured to include a variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd) configured so that the game ball is not able to enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to include a plurality of types of auxiliary game short time flags, that is, to include a plurality of auxiliary game short time states (or time-reduced game states).
Pachinko machines related to this concept (6)
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member C is more likely to be open than the normal gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state have a second specific game state in which the displacement mode of the variable member C can be different when the easy entry game is executed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the auxiliary game short time flag that is turned on after the big hit relating to the big hit symbol may be different depending on the big hit symbol, that is, the auxiliary game short time state (or the time reduction gaming state) may be different. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (7)
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member C is more likely to be open than the normal gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state have a second specific game state in which the displacement mode of the variable member C can be different when an easy-to-enter ball game is executed. ,
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the sorting member is displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time, triggered by the auxiliary game winning (first opening timing of the electric game object) (first mode) In the aspect and the second aspect, the opening entrance to be guided may be different), and as a concept based on the structure,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (10)
The distribution member is configured to be able to be displaced when the easy-to-play game is executed,
When an easy-to-enter ball game is executed, the sorting member is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time.

  In addition, the long opening of the electric accessory illustrated in “No. 11” in FIG. 1 is an opening for a predetermined time or more, and the short opening of the electric accessory is an opening for a predetermined time or less. A long opening is an opening of 0.5 seconds or more, and a short opening is an opening of 0.3 seconds or less.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured so that the average value of the expected winning ball value on the first main game side is different from the average expected value of the winning ball value on the second main game side. As a concept based on this structure,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (13)
Expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed when the information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is different. A pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the ratio that the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on after the end of the big hit on the first main game side and the ratio that the auxiliary game short time flag B is turned on after the big hit on the second main game side are turned on It may be configured differently, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (14)
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.

The pachinko machine according to this example is
It may be configured to determine whether the auxiliary game short time flag A is turned on or the auxiliary game short time flag B is turned on, depending on only the jackpot symbol, not depending on the gaming state, and a concept based on the structure as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (15)
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination than the normal gaming state). The object B11d) has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state;
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
The ratio of the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information to be in the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the first main game A configuration in which the ratio of the first specific gaming state after the end of the special game executed when the identification information or the two-main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a group different from the predetermined group is different Has been
A ratio of entering the first specific gaming state after the end of the special game executed by the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the normal gaming state; In the specific game state, the ratio of the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information to be in the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be the same.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the opening pattern B of the electric accessory is relatively easier to enter the electric accessory than the opening pattern A (total opening time or long opening time is long. (Total opening time = when the auxiliary game side wins once, the total of each opening time when executing one or more opening times, long opening time = auxiliary game side) In the case of winning once in the opening time that is the longest in the case of performing one or more opening), as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (16)
As a displacement mode of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy-entry ball game is executed, the first displacement mode and the variable member C (for example, more than the first displacement mode) It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by having a second displacement mode in which the period during which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is opened is long.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that, in the right region of the board, in order from the upstream, the electric combination → the second non-electric combination → the first non-electric combination → the auxiliary game start port. As a concept based on composition,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (17)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start opening BA12) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) A variable member A (for example, the first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start start) A variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that changes toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening entrance (for example, the first opening entrance C22). A sorting member (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced in the second mode;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
As a flow down route where game balls flow down in the game area, it has a first flow down route and a second flow down route different from the first flow down route,
When the game ball flows down the second flow down route, the variable member A (for example, the first non-powered accessory A12hd), the variable member B (for example, the second non-electrically connected item B10hd), and the variable member C ( For example, it is configured to flow down in the vicinity of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
As the order of flow when the game ball flows down the second flow down route, the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member B (for example, the second non-electric combination B10hd), The pachinko gaming machine is configured to flow down in the order of the variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is a game to the first non-powered game and the second non-powered game in a situation where the auxiliary game short flag (auxiliary game short flag A, auxiliary game short flag B) is off. Even if there is a ball entering, an error notification may not be made until there is a predetermined number of balls that is a condition for the non-electrically-powered object to be closed (further, the first non-electric-powered object and the second non-electric-powered object are not It is not the sum of the number of balls entered into the electric accessory, but an error when there is a predetermined number of balls in the first non-electric character, and an error when there is a predetermined number of balls in the second non-electric character As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (18)
When an error determination condition based on the state of entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) or the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is satisfied Comprises error determination means for determining that an error has occurred,
When the first variable member is in an open state, the first entrance is configured to be closed by a predetermined number of entrances to the first entrance,
When the second variable member is in an open state, the second entrance is configured to be closed by a specific number of entrances to the second entrance,
In the normal gaming state, it is configured to determine that an error has occurred when there is the predetermined number of entrances to the first entrance.
In the normal gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to determine that an error has occurred when the specific number of balls entered the second entrance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to have a jackpot symbol that shifts to the probability variation gaming state and a jackpot symbol that transitions to the non-probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may have multiple types of probability variation | change big hit symbols which are the big hit symbols which will transfer to a probability change game state after the big hit end. In addition, the ratio of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the second main game side may be configured to be higher than the ratio of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the first main game side.
Pachinko machines related to this concept (19)
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game and is in the first specific game state, a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in the second specific game state after the end of the special game, It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by having at least a special game C that enters a low-probability lottery state after the special game ends.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the ratio of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the second main game side is higher than the ratio of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the first main game side. As a concept based on
Pachinko machines related to this concept (22)
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and when the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed, the second specified The ratio of the game state is determined by the high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be smaller than the proportion of being in the second specific gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the average value of the expected winning ball value at the second major game side is greater than the average value of the expected winning value at the first major game side. As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (23)
When the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the special game A or the special game B, the execution of the special game A or the special game B The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the special game A or special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. In the case of B, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be smaller than an expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A or the special game B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the stay stage is different according to the auxiliary game short time flag that is on, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (24)
The game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is more likely to be open than in the normal game state. And
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy entry game is executed. A second specific gaming state that can be different,
As a stay stage that can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), at least a first stay stage and a second stay stage that is a stay stage different from the first stay stage are included.
It is configured so that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) differs depending on the stay stage,
In the first specific gaming state, the stay stage can be the first stay stage,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the stay stage can be the second stay stage in the second specific gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that, in a portion of the big hit that is the probability variation big hit B, the big hit that is not the probability variation big hit and the stay stage immediately after the big hit ends are the same.
Pachinko machines related to this concept (25)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
As a special game, it has at least a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state after the special game ends and becomes a second specific game state, and a special game C that becomes a low-probability lottery state after the special game ends,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the stay stage is the same after the end of the special game A and after the end of the special game C.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to always shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the probability variation gaming state may be terminated by the number of symbol variations after the jackpot ends. ,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (26)
The first identification information variation display start / stop display or the second identification information variation display start to stop display is regarded as one unit, and the number of repetitions of the one unit is a predetermined number of times after entering the high probability lottery state after the end of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in a low-probability lottery state when it becomes.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the number of time reductions on the first main game side is equal to or less than a predetermined number, while the number of time reductions on the second main game side may be a predetermined number. as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (28)
The first main game identification information is assigned to the predetermined group as compared to the case where the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. The number of the predetermined number is smaller or the second main game identification information is in a predetermined group when the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode to which it belongs. The case where the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed by the stop display in the belonging stop display mode and the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the predetermined number of times is the same as when the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed by the above.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured so that the first main game side has a probability variation big hit A and a probability variation big hit B, while the second main game side has a probability variation big hit B and does not have a probability variation big hit A. (The second main game side may have a higher probability change big hit B ratio in the big hit than the first main game side), and as a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (29)
After the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first main game identification information can be in the high probability lottery state and become the first specific game state, or It is configured to be in a high probability lottery state and become a second specific gaming state,
After the special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the high probability lottery state and the second specific game state can be obtained. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in a probability lottery state and not to be in a first specific gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a non-stochastic fluctuation after the jackpot that has reached the predetermined number of times, when the number of consecutive wins in the situation where the game is in the probability-variable gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times (the probability variation upper limit value). It may be configured to be in a gaming state, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (30)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state than the normal gaming state
When the special game is executed as a unit when the lottery is in the high probability lottery state, the unit is configured to be in the low-probability lottery state and become the specific game state when the unit continues for a predetermined number of times. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the average value of the number of time reductions in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the big hit that is the probability variation upper limit value is whether the big hit is a big hit on the first main game side or It may be configured to differ depending on whether it is a big hit, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (31)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state than the normal gaming state
When a special game is executed as a unit when it is in a high-probability lottery state, the unit is configured to be in a low-probability lottery state and become a specific game state when the unit continues for a predetermined number of times.
From the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of that unit is the specific number of times after entering the specific gaming state after the end of the special game Is configured to enter the normal gaming state when
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the high probability lottery state, the special game is executed, and the specific number of times when the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are entered after the special game ends is specified. Number of times A,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the high probability lottery state, the special game is executed, and the specific number of times when the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are entered after the special game ends is specified. If the number of times is B,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number of times B is larger than the specific number of times A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to execute a lottery to shift from the probability variation gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state for each variation of the main game symbol, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (32)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state than the normal gaming state
The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a low-probability lottery state for each variation display of identification information in a high-probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the average value of the number of time reductions after the big hit ends is different between the big hit on the first main game side and the big hit on the second main game side. as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (33)
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state than the normal gaming state
From the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of that unit is the specific number of times after entering the specific gaming state after the end of the special game Is configured to enter the normal gaming state when
The specific number of times after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is defined as the specific number of times A,
When the specific number of times after the end of the special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the specific number of times B,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number of times B is larger than the specific number of times A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to enter a specific area C22 during a big hit to shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the big hit (also referred to as a ball game machine), and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (34)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20),
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
A success / failure determination means for executing a determination of success / failure based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20), control is performed to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information. Identification information display control means;
A special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination of success / failure by the determination unit for winning / failing is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group Special game control means to be executed;
Control that has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10) than the normal gaming state, and is set to the specific gaming state after completion of execution of the special game A gaming state transition control means capable of,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed In, it is configured so that the execution contents of the special game are different from each other,
During the execution of the special game, there is a predetermined number of balls in the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) or until the predetermined time elapses (for example, the first big winning opening C10). ) Can be executed in a state advantageous to the player,
The ease of entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in a unit game in a corresponding special game.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the big hit on the second main game side is longer than the big hit on the first main game side (the big hit where the big winning opening is long open in the distributed game execution round) May be configured to be high, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (35)
In the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the determination of success / failure by the first success / failure determination means is winning. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is relatively stopped and displayed more easily than when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to have a plurality of types of long open jackpots (the type of the game state that shortens the time after the big hit can be different depending on the type of the long open jackpot. As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (36)
A pachinko gaming machine having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to a first specific group in a specific group.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the winning probability of the small hit is higher on the first main gaming side than on the second main gaming side, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (37)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
It has a variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining the first stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit. When,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the second stop identification information after variably displaying the second identification information in the second identification information display section When,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is winning, the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information is stopped in the first main game identification information display unit or the second main game identification information display unit. And a special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player after being displayed,
During the execution of the special game, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. ,
A pachinko game characterized in that the rate at which the special game is executed based on the result of the second success / failure determination is lower than the rate at which the special game is executed based on the result of the first success / failure determination Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to have a distribution start port unit that alternately distributes game balls to the first main game start port and the second main game start port. ,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (38)
A game board (eg, game area D30);
A game ball distribution unit (for example, distribution start port unit C50) disposed in an opening formed in a game board (for example, game area D30);
A first main game start port B (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance where game balls can enter (for example, the distribution entrance C20),
A variable member attached to the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start port BA12) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start opening BA12) can enter the game ball or can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start opening BA12) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electrical accessory A12hd) configured such that a game ball cannot enter the main game start opening BA12) or is difficult to enter compared to an open state;
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and can be displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the entrance ball opening C20) or can enter the game ball more easily than in the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the entrance ball entrance (for example, the entrance ball entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first entrance (for example, a first open entrance C22) that is provided downstream of a sorting entrance (eg, a sort entrance ball C20). )When,
A second entrance (for example, a second open entrance C23) that is provided downstream of a distribution entrance (for example, an assignment entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second entrance). Opening entrance C23) is a member that is changed toward any of the opening entrances C23), and when it is displaced to the first mode, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first opening, and when it is displaced to the second mode, the second release is performed. A sorting member B (for example, a sorting member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the mouth;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The game ball distribution unit (for example, the distribution start unit C50)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first main game start port A (for example, a first main game start port) provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, a common entrance port C51), which is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter. AA10)
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, the common entrance port C51), which is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter. )When,
The first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) and the second main game start port (for example, the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common ball entrance (for example, the common entrance C51) , A second main game start port B10) that changes toward one of the first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) and the second main game start port. A distribution member A (for example, a start port distribution member C50y) configured to be alternately changed toward a mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10);
A variable member that is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced in the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter the game, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is difficult to enter compared to the open state. The pachinko gaming machine is provided with a variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical accessory B10hd).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the probability variation number and the number of time reductions are different in the gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state can be ended by the number of symbol variation, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (40-1)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information display section is variably displayed on the first identification information display section. When,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section. When,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) A special game is executed in which a unit game that can make a variable winning slot (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player is performed until there is a ball or a predetermined period elapses. With special game control means that are possible,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of change display of the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit. Until one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to enter the low probability lottery state,
In the case of a specific gaming state, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one is calculated from when the specific gaming state is entered. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second count is more than the first count,
The final round of the specific gaming state when the player enters the normal gaming state when the unit is performed the first time, counting from the time when the player is in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state. In, the second identification information is configured such that the average value of the variable display period of the second identification information belonging to a group other than the predetermined group is an average value A,
The final round of the specific gaming state when the player enters the normal gaming state when the unit is performed a second time, counting from the time when the lottery is in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state. The second identification information is configured such that the average value of the variable display period of the second identification information belonging to a group other than the predetermined group is an average value B that is a value different from the average value A. It is a pachinko game machine.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (40-2)
A start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced between the open state and the closed state, and when displaced, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) B10) can enter the ball or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the ball at the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member that is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the state (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means. When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning holes (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) or predetermined. Special game control means capable of executing a special game that can execute a unit game that can make a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player until the period elapses. And
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is based on the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of change display of the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit. Until one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to enter the low probability lottery state,
In the case of a specific gaming state, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one is calculated from when the specific gaming state is entered. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The first number of times is the same number as the predetermined number of times or a number of times equal to or more than the predetermined number of times,
The second number is less than the predetermined number,
Fluctuation period state transition that has a plurality of fluctuation period states with different average values of the variation display periods of the identification information and controls to change the fluctuation period state from a certain fluctuation period state to a different fluctuation period state Is configured to run
From the time when the specified gaming state is reached until the first unit is performed the first number of times, until the gaming state that is in the high-probability lottery state and the specified gaming state ends when the normal gaming state is not set The number of the variable period state transitions to be executed is a first variable period state transition number,
From the time of entering the specific gaming state until the one unit is performed the second time, in the case of not being in the normal gaming state, until the gaming state that is in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state ends When the number of the change period state transition to be executed is the second change period state transition number,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the first variation period state transition count and the second variation period state transition count can be different.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (40-3)
A start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced between the open state and the closed state, and when displaced, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) B10) can enter the ball or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the ball at the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member that is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the state (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, the random number temporarily storing means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur,
Control that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit based on the random number related to the certain hold, and then the identification information is stopped and displayed when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied Identification information display control means,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning holes (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) or predetermined. Special game control means capable of executing a special game that can execute a unit game that can make a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player until the period elapses. And
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is based on the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As a stay stage that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), it has a plurality of stay stages.
It is configured so that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) differs depending on the stay stage,
The stay stage in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state is different from the stay stage in the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific game state,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect that is an effect suggesting the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
A pachinko game that is configured to be able to execute the same holding pre-reading effect in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state and in the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific game state. Machine.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (40-4)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped. First identification information display control means for controlling to display;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and then the second identification information is stopped. Second identification information display control means for controlling to display;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) A special game is executed in which a unit game that can make a variable winning slot (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player is performed until there is a ball or a predetermined period elapses. With special game control means that are possible,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
When a special game is executed as a unit when it is in a high-probability lottery state, the unit is configured to be in a low-probability lottery state and become a specific game state when the unit continues for a predetermined number of times.
In the case of a specific gaming state, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to enter the normal gaming state until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be a first variable period state in a specific period in a specific game state after the end of execution of a special game, and in the first variable period state, until a specific condition is satisfied , Configured to be controlled so as not to be in the second fluctuation period state,
The first identification information from the variable display start to the stop display or the second identification information from the variable display start to the stop display as one unit, and the unit is configured to be executed once or more in the specific period. ,
As a stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group in the predetermined group, it has a plurality of types of stop display modes,
As a stop display mode belonging to the second predetermined group in the predetermined group, having a plurality of types of stop display modes,
The period until the predetermined condition is satisfied in the case where the specific game state is entered after the end of the special game executed when any of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the first predetermined group is stopped and displayed. The period until the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special game state is entered after the end of the special game executed when any one of the plural types of stop display modes belonging to the second predetermined group is stopped and displayed. Is configured to be relatively short-term,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As a stay stage that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), it has a plurality of stay stages.
It is configured so that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) differs depending on the stay stage,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that a stay stage in a high-probability lottery state and in a specific gaming state and a stay stage in a low-probability lottery state and in a specific gaming state are configured to be the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the stay stage is different between the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. ,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (41)
A pachinko gaming machine configured so that a stay stage in a high-probability lottery state and a specific game state is different from a stay stage in a low-probability lottery state and a specific game state It is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example wins a big hit on the first main game side in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, so that the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state transitioned after the big winning is completed. The stay stage may be configured to be the stay stage A. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (42)
When the special game is executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the high-probability lottery state and the normal game state, and in the high-probability lottery state There is a difference in the stay stage after the end of the special game when the special game is executed because the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group when there is a specific game state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state in the case of probability variation number ≧ time reduction number, and a variation time of the final variation in the time shortening gaming state and a probability variation gaming state and time in case of probability variation number <time reduction number. The variation time of the final variation of the shortened gaming state may be configured such that the trend (average value of variation time, variation time varies depending on the number of holdings, production mode, etc.), and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (43)
From the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display, or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of the unit is predetermined after the special game ends and the high probability lottery state is entered. It is configured to be in a low probability lottery state when the number of times is reached,
From the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of that unit is the specific number of times after entering the specific gaming state after the end of the special game Is configured to enter the normal gaming state when
In a high-probability lottery state and a specific gaming state, when the predetermined number of times is greater than the specific number of times, in the final round of the specific gaming state, the second identification information belongs to a group other than the predetermined group The average value of the variable information display period is configured to be the average value A,
In the case of a high probability lottery state and a specific gaming state, and the predetermined number of times is less than the specific number of times, the second identification information belongs to a group other than the predetermined group in the final round of the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the average value of the variable display period of information is configured to be an average value B that is different from the average value A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the stay stage in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is the same as the stay stage in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. As a concept based on
Pachinko machines related to this concept (45)
A pachinko game characterized in that the stay stage in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state is the same as the stay stage in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the variation mode determination table referred to when determining the variation time in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is the same. As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (46)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state than the normal gaming state
A table that is referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, and the identification information in the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the table that is referred to when determining the variable display time is the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that tables to be referred to when determining the variation time are different between the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (47)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state than the normal gaming state
A table that is referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, and the identification information in the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be different from a table that is referred to when the variable display time is determined.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured so that the number of times the table to be referred to is changed in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is less than that in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (48)
Fluctuation period state transition that has a plurality of fluctuation period states with different average values of the variation display periods of the identification information and controls to change the fluctuation period state from a certain fluctuation period state to a different fluctuation period state Is configured to run
After the special game is over, it is in a high-probability lottery state and becomes a specific gaming state, and is more special than the number of times of the transition period state transition executed until the gaming state that is a high-probability lottery state and the specific gaming state ends. After the game is over, the number of the transition period state transitions that are executed until the game state that is in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state is completed and the game state that is in the low probability lottery state and is in the specific game state is relative. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to increase in size.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has a probability variation gaming state when the probability variation number ≧ the number of time reduction times and a limited frequency table transition to which the time shortening gaming state refers, and a probability variation gaming state when the probability variation number <the time reduction times and What is the limited frequency table transition referred to by the time-reduced gaming state? Trend {table transition count, reach variation execution ratio (reach variation execution ratio is probability variation count ≧ time-shortened count probability probability gaming state and time-reduced gaming state Is compared with the table that is referenced for the longest time and the table that is referenced for the longest time in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the probability variation number is less than the number of time reductions)), etc. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (49)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
After the special game is over, the game state that is in the high probability lottery state and in the specific game state, and is in the high probability lottery state and in the specific game state ends when the predetermined number of times is equal to or greater than the specific number of times. The number of times of the variable period state transition executed until the first variable period state transition number
When the special game is over, the game state is in the high probability lottery state and in the specific game state, and the predetermined number of times is less than the specific number of times, the game state is in the high probability lottery state and in the specific game state. When the number of times of the change period state transition executed until the end is the second number of change period state transitions,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first variation period state transition count and the second variation period state transition count may be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to have a plurality of types of time reduction, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (50)
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state than the normal gaming state
From the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of that unit is the specific number of times after entering the specific gaming state after the end of the special game Is configured to enter the normal gaming state when
The pachinko gaming machine is configured to have at least a specific number of times A and a specific number of times B that are different from the specific number of times A as the specific number of times.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to execute the same look-ahead effect in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. As a concept,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (51)
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect that is an effect suggesting the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
A pachinko game that is configured to be able to execute the same holding pre-reading effect in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state and in the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific game state. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state to a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state (a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state to a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state. ) May be configured not to be executed across prefetch effects when transitioning to), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (52)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the starting port and displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced in the open state, a game ball can enter the starting port or is easier to enter than in the closed state, A variable member configured such that when the ball is displaced into the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the starting port or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the start opening;
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, the random number temporarily storing means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur,
Control that the identification information is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit in accordance with the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied Identification information display control means,
Special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening an advantageous state for the player after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit when the result of the determination of success / failure is winning And
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect that is an effect suggesting the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
The holding pre-reading effect is a high probability lottery state and is configured to be non-executable from a gaming state that is a specific gaming state to a low probability lottery state and a gaming state that is a specific gaming state It is a gaming machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, in a gaming machine in which the limited frequency table changes in the time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state A that refers to the limited frequency table A and the limited frequency state B that refers to the limited frequency table B Is present,
(1) In the limited frequency state B, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that causes a loss when the number of reservations is the first number of reservations (for example, 0), and the number of reservations is the second number of reservations (for example, 3 The average value difference of a predetermined period arises with the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that becomes a loss in the case of the
(2) In the limited frequency state A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that causes a loss when the number of holds is the first number of holds (for example, 0), and the number of holds is the second number of holds (for example, 3 The average value difference of the predetermined period does not occur with the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that becomes a loss in the case of the
(3) The second hold number in the limited frequency state B (for example, 3) is the most selected than the variation time that is most likely to be lost in the second hold number (for example, 3) in the limited frequency state A. The fluctuation time that is likely to be lost is longer.
(4) The limited frequency state B stays for a longer period (number of fluctuations) than the limited frequency state A.
(5) The specific effects that can be displayed in the limited frequency state B are not displayed in the limited frequency state A.
(6) When the game is in the time-reduced game state, the prefetch effect related to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) Although there are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency state B, there is only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state B and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A may be configured so that the types thereof are different. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (53)
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be in a first variable period state in a specific period in a specific game state after completion of execution of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be controlled so as to be in the second variable period state after the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a non-stochastic fluctuation after the jackpot that has reached the predetermined number of times, when the number of consecutive wins in the situation where the game is in the probability-variable gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times (the probability variation upper limit value). It may be configured to be a gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (54)
When the special game is executed as a unit when the lottery is in the high probability lottery state, the unit is configured to be in the low-probability lottery state and become the specific game state when the unit continues for a predetermined number of times. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the timing (number of symbol fluctuations after the end of jackpot) is switched when the limited frequency table to be referenced is switched between the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. (The limited frequency table to be referenced may be the same or different between the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and is only referred to. The timing based on which the limited frequency table is switched is the same),
Pachinko machines related to this concept (56)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the starting port and displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced in the open state, a game ball can enter the starting port or is easier to enter than in the closed state, A variable member configured such that when the ball is displaced into the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the starting port or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
Special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening an advantageous state for the player after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit when the result of the determination of success / failure is winning When,
With
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is based on the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be in a first variable period state in a specific period in a specific game state after completion of execution of the special game. After reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times, the second variation period state can be controlled.
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the specific number of times is the same in the case of the high probability lottery state and the case of the low probability lottery state.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, there are cases where the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state are ended depending on the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and when it is not ended (substantially continues until the next jackpot). As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (57)
As a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it has at least a stop display mode A and a stop display mode B which is a stop display mode different from the stop display mode A,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A The specified number of times in the case of a state is the first specified number of times,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B When the specific number of times in the state becomes the second specific number of times,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the first specific number of times is greater than the second specific number of times.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that when the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state continue until the next time, the variation pattern table after a specific number of times (the number of times shortened when not continuing until the next time) changes. Well, as a concept based on the structure,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (58)
As a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it has at least a stop display mode A and a stop display mode B which is a stop display mode different from the stop display mode A,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A The specified number of times in the case of a state is the first specified number of times,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B When the specific number of times in the state becomes the second specific number of times,
The first specific number is configured to be greater than the second specific number,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A A table that is referred to when determining the variable display time of the identification information that is displayed in a variable manner from the end of the special game to the stop display of the identification information that is the second specific number of times, A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be different from a table that is referred to when determining a variable display time of identification information that is variably displayed after the stop display of the identification information that is two specific times. .

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is an effect that can be executed during a big hit, an effect that informs that there is a hold that is scheduled to be a big hit in the hold, in a non-stochastic game state and a time-reduced game state It may be configured to be executed during the winning jackpot (can be executed in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, or may be performed in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state), and based on the configuration As a concept,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (59)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the starting port and displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced in the open state, a game ball can enter the starting port or is easier to enter than in the closed state, A variable member configured such that when the ball is displaced into the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the starting port or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the start opening;
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, the random number temporarily storing means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur,
Control that the identification information is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit in accordance with the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied Identification information display control means,
Special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening an advantageous state for the player after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit when the result of the determination of success / failure is winning And
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is based on the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that tends to be in an open state,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect that is an effect suggesting the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
When the special game is executed in the low probability state and the specific game state, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the hold prefetch effect during the execution of the special game.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22, and a sound effect corresponding to the gaming state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game start opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) can be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. {However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game balls flowing down the reference) may be configured not to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, a first grand prize winning port C10 and a second grand prize winning port C20 are provided above the out port D36, and a game ball flowing down the right side or the left side (based on the center of the game region) of the game region D30. Is configured so as to easily pass through the area where the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out mouth D36.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and is an out port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above D36. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above the opening D36. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display with symbols or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game U content Part) SM, the sub-sub control part SS that mainly executes the effect display, the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the prizes received in the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 to be paid out to the dish D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) of the upper ball dish D20 The game area D30 Turning on / off the launcher D42 that launches one ball at a time, the launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of the launcher D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. }, A drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big prize opening electric combination solenoid C13, second big prize opening electric combination solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is indispensable to control the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown). . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  The “random number” in the claims and the present specification is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “0” to “0” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). The value is randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  In addition, the limited frequency is the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, and the change rate of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or the selection rate, and continues for a predetermined period. In addition, a table that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol in the limited frequency state is referred to as a limited frequency table, and there may be a plurality of types of limited frequency tables. A limited frequency table to be referred to is determined based on the number of times the main game symbol is changed later. Further, switching from a state referred to as the limited frequency table A (also referred to as the limited frequency state A) to a state referring to the limited frequency table B (also referred to as the limited frequency state B) is referred to as a transition of the limited frequency state. ing. It should be noted that the limited frequency state can be configured to have a plurality of even in one gaming state, and the limited frequency state may be configured to transit a plurality of times in one gaming state. In addition, when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, the selection rate of the variation mode is made different with reference to the common limited frequency table (ie, the selection target and the selection target). The variation mode itself is the same, but the selection rate is different) (or the variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, but a fixed value further to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode) May be adopted.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counters) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B that measures the drive (release) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. doing. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures the winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number, and a time reduction number counter MP52c capable of counting the time variation number. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have a function of performing a lottery transition from a specific game (for example, a probability-change game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. Good (so-called pachinko machines with a falling lottery function).

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Here, the drawing variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game in order to switch the effect stage. In addition, the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times that a big hit is won continuously during a specific game that continues.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the power supply unit E reset button ( It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been intentionally performed by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compared to the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM). To do. If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up in the RAM in step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in step 1012. In step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and will be described later. The control command transmission process may be used for transmission), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers a scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the processing in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The winning ball payout control board KH is executed, and processing for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing (output of information to the external terminal board, the hall computer H, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (NMI interrupt in this example), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H <b> 10 (inflow, in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in Step 1102, in Step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the hold ball in the form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M, together with information on what number is held. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric-powered object releasing flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1202, in Step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (the flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag) and the acquired auxiliary gaming side gaming state and The main control board is determined by determining the stop symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the holding ball (for example, when the auxiliary game short flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off). Temporarily store in M RAM area.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol is “D0, D1” and the stop symbol that is the winning symbol is “D1”, which is released due to each stop. In the non-time-reduced game, when the symbol that is stopped is “D1”, the open mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (0.2 second open → 0.2 second closed → 0.2 second open → 3.0 second closed → 4. 0 seconds open → closed). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during non-time-reduced games, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during time-reduced games.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol change time to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short time flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer. After starting MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g is started.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. In step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning” (D1 · D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side (for example, in the case of the winning symbol “D1”, it is opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second) -> Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Open in a closed state. In the case of a winning symbol "D2," open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds) The predetermined time concerning the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric accessory is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric agent releasing flag. In step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d in the second main game start port B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 and sets the electric accessory release flag. Turn off and proceed to the next process (process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process proceeds to (Step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port entrance information has been received from the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining the success / failure, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entrance information from the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the random determination random number for the first main game and the acquisition lot random number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and proceed to the next process (process in step 1400). In the case of No in Step 1302 and Step 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312. In the case of No in Step 1312 and Step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 1400).

  In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in Step 1310 and Step 1320. However, the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and the information indicating that a random number has been acquired can be substituted by these pieces of information.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether there is no second main game symbol hold. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process to be described later, and the next process {the process of steps 1400 (1) and (2). }. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1), (2). The process proceeds to.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is fixedly displayed), during the variable fixed time, the fluctuation start condition for the next variable You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406. The second main game content determination random number) is read, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is stored. Shift (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1408, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol determination lottery based on a first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a winning lottery random number).

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table (second main game success / failure lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the small hit is not provided, it is not limited to this, You may comprise so that a small hit may be provided in the 1st main game side and / or the 2nd main game side.

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols related to the symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game is selected from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “5A · 7A” and “5B · 7B”). The symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 5A, 5B, and 16R for 7A, 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. May}

  Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the main game based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). The variation pattern of the game symbols is determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the process proceeds to Step 1418.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this example, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the result of lottery determination of the main game symbol. That is, when the result of the main game symbol is a winning lottery, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the change is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}.

  Next, in step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) relating to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and A command related to the current gaming state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side). To be sent). Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1428.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1426, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428. If No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation ends. It is set in the buffer MT10 (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) The main game symbol variation display is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1436, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Even in the case of No in step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c. In the case of Yes in step 1554, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1556, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1570. Note that if the result is No in step 1552 or step 1556, the process proceeds to step 1570.

  Next, in step 1570, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1574, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1574, in step 1576, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1578, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600). Note that if the answer is No in step 1570 or step 1574, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag). Next, in step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1700). In the case of No in step 1602, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1702, in Steps 1704 and 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, when it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continues to open, a pattern that performs opening and closing). To do. Next, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1720, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (especially, an opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1722. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes in steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not elapses. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. In the case of No in step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). Is stopped and the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1733, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of a round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). . If Yes in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag in step 1736. Next, in step 1738, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). In step 1750, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1734, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1770, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1771, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1772, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is the time-short A big hit symbol (the big hit symbol with the shortest number of time reductions, in this example, 2A · 2B). To do. In the case of Yes in step 1772, in step 1773, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value A (60 times in this example) to the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1772, in step 1775, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the current stop symbol is the symbol for the time-shortage A big hit (the symbol for the short-time count is medium, in this example, 3A). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1775, in step 1776, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value B (80 times in this example) to the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1775, in other words, if the current stop symbol is a time-short C big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with the largest number of time reductions, in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B), step 1778 Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value C (100 times in this example) to the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to Step 1779.

  Next, in step 1779, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1780, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag. Next, in step 1781, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a time-short B big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in Step 1781, in Step 1782, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game won in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in Step 1782, in Step 1783, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special stage command (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by Step 1999 control command transmission processing), and performs the next processing (Step 1997). As described above, in the case of winning the jackpot related to the short-time B big hit symbol on the first main game side in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the stay stage is set as the “space stage” (in other big hit symbols) When the big hit is won, the stay stage becomes “night stage”). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997) also in the case of No in step 1781 or step 1782. Here, the stay stage is a stage that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect that is displayed when the stay stage is different (the type of notice effect that can be executed and the execution) The types of background effects that can be performed, the frequency of execution of notice effects that can be performed, the frequency of execution of background effects that can be performed, and the like are different. Thus, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the number of time reductions after the end of a big hit may differ with big hit symbols, that is, it has multiple types of the number of time savings which can be provided. In addition, the configuration related to the number of time reductions is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, the configuration is such that there are a plurality of time reductions given when a non-stochastic game state and a time reduction game state are entered after the big hit. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of probability variation given after the end of the big hit and the number of time reductions are configured to be different. And the case where the number of time reductions is greater than the number of times of probability change (the number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions indicate the maximum number of times that can be continued if a big win is not won). In addition, the average value of the number of short hours given after the end of the big hit is “60 × 200/1024 + 80 × 500/1024 + 100 × 324/1024 = 82.42” after the big hit on the first main game side, After the big hit on the second main game side is “60 × 200/1024 + 100 × 824/1024 = 92.19”, the big hit on the first main game side is after the big hit on the second main game side It is configured such that the number of time reductions given after the end is relatively larger. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the number of short time times given after the end of the big hit on the first main game side is relatively greater than after the big hit on the second main game side. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the configuration after the big hit on the second main game side is relatively easier to shift to the probability variation gaming state than after the big hit on the first main game side. is there. In addition, as a configuration having multiple types of time reductions that can be granted after the end of the special game, depending on whether the special game was won in the time-reduced gaming state or the special game was won in the non-time-reduced gaming state (as described above, open (It doesn't matter if you win a special game while the time extension function is activated or if you win a special game when the opening time extension function is not activated.) You may comprise so that it can do. In such a configuration, when a special game is won in the time-saving game state, the number of time reductions after the completion of the special game may be greater than the certain number of changes (the special game is the first game). Only the special game on the main game side may be used, or the special game may be only on the special game on the second main game side). Further, when a special game is won in the non-time-reduced game state, the number of time reductions after the end of the special game may not be greater than the probability variation number (the special game may be special on the first main game side). It may be only in the case of a game, or only if the special game is a special game on the second main game side).

Moreover, you may comprise as follows.
(1) Regardless of whether or not the game state won for the special game is a time-reduced game state, if the special game is a special game on the second main game side, the number of time reductions is 100 times.
(2) When the special game on the first main game side is won in the time-reduced game state, the number of time reductions will be 100, while the special game on the first main game side is won in the non-time-reduced game state Based on the jackpot symbol related to the special game, the number of time reductions is either 60 times, 80 times, or 100 times.
(3) If a special game is won in the time-saving game state, the number of time reductions will be 100 regardless of the big hit symbol.
(4) The average number of time reductions when winning the special game on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state is the number of time reductions when winning the special game on the second main game side in the time-reduced gaming state. Greater than average value. In such a configuration, the second main game side is given priority, “the expected value of the number of winning balls by the first main game side jackpot <the expected value of the number of winning balls by the second main game side jackpot” ”Can be compensated for the disadvantage of winning the big hit on the first main game side in the time-saving game state. In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called tamabuki machine) in which a game ball enters a specific area within the big winning opening during a big hit and becomes a probability-variable gaming state after the big hit, If the ratio of long open big hit <the ratio of second main game side long open big hit> is won, the short open big hit is won, and during the short open big hit, a game ball enters a specific area In the case where there is not, the number of short hours may be configured so that the short open big hit on the first main game side is relatively larger than the short open big hit on the second main game side. In addition, if the first main game side wins a long open big hit and the game ball does not enter a specific area during the long open big hit, the shorter number of times the second main game side short open big hit It may be configured to be more than the number of times when the winning ball is won and there is no game ball entering the specific area during the short open big hit. In addition, when the second main game side wins a long open big hit, and the game ball does not enter a specific area during the long open big hit, the shorter number of times the first main game side short open big hit It may be configured to be more than the number of times when the winning ball is won and there is no game ball entering the specific area during the short open big hit. In addition, the long open big hit means that the big winning opening is in the distribution game execution round in the big hit (the game ball enters the specific area during the round execution and shifts to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends). It is a big hit that makes it easy to enter a specific area by opening for a relatively long time, and a short open big hit is a distribution game execution round during a big hit (a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the round) This is a big hit that makes it difficult to enter a specific area when the big winning opening is opened for a relatively short time at the end of the big hit.

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 17 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 9A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clearing). When the information is received → the sub-side RAM is initialized, when various information commands are received → the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 5B, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a hold information management process to be described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decoration symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a stay stage determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a display command transmission control process (sends commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive process routine. To do.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2100 to S2900) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is a terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a command input port (described above) from the main control board M side. Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new hold occurrence command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in Step 2102, in Step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing suspension counter (in this example, the maximum for the first main game and the maximum for the second main game is 4). 1 "is added (incremented). Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds the hold information (in particular, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery. The random number / design lottery random number / variation mode lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to Step 2116.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts the hold information related to the symbol variation to the remaining hold information. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. In the case of No in step 2108, the processing proceeds to step 2116 without executing the processing of step 2110 to step 2114. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). Is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the decorative symbol stop symbol {for example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, such as “7/7/7” If the symbol is a lost symbol, a variation such as “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Note that if the result in Step 2402 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the decorative symbol variation display command (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). The process proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2414, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). The process proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2418, in step 2422, whether the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the display timing of the notice image or the reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub sub control unit SS side). The process proceeds to step 2426. Note that if the result is No in step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2436, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a decoration symbol stop display command (deterministic display command) (transmits it to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). To do). Next, in step 2438, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol changing flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2500). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2410 or Step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in steps 2506 and 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special game in-progress flag and displays a big hit start display on the effect display device SG. (Display is performed appropriately based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to Step 2512. Note that if the result in Step 2502 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type). Next, in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (appropriate display is performed based on the big hit type). Next, in step 2524, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special gaming flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Note that if the answer is No in step 2504 or step 2520, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stay stage switching timing {for example, the timing at which the special game is ended (winned), the timing at which the gaming state is shifted, even in the same gaming state) It is determined whether or not the timing at which the change mode determination table is switched, the timing at which the number of changes reaches the predetermined number, etc. (even in the same gaming state) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2606, in step 2607, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special stage command (command set in step 1783) from the main side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2607, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the stay stage {the type of effect content, and the effects that can be executed when the stay stage is different (background effect, notice effect, etc.) are different. "Space Stage" is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900). As described above, in this embodiment, when the special stage command is received from the main side, that is, when the winning combination of the short-time B big hit symbol is won in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the “space stage” stays. It is configured to be set as a stage.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2607, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “night stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “Evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2616, in step 2618, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “empty stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2616, that is, if the current gaming state is a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced gaming state (the gaming state is also referred to as a normal gaming state), in step 2620, the sub control board S CPUSC sets “daytime stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). In addition, also in the case of No in step 2602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900). As described above, in this embodiment, the stay stages are different depending on the gaming state, and there are a plurality of stay stages that can be set in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Also, if you win the time B big win symbol (3A in this example) on the first main game side in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state, the stay after the end of the special game related to the time B big hit symbol The stage is a “space stage” (the gaming state is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state), while in the other cases (especially the time reduction on the first main game side in the probability-changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state) When the B big win symbol is won), the stay stage after the end of the special game will be the “night stage” (the gaming state will be the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), that is, the special for the same big hit symbol Even after the end of the game, the stay stage after the end of the special game can be different depending on the game state when the special game is won. The stay stage in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state can be set to “space stage” and “night stage”, while the stay stage in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is “evening stage”. The stay stages differ depending on the gaming state. Further, the stay stage in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state is only the “empty stage”, and the number of types is less than the stay stage in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. Further, the stay stage may be changed one or more times in the same gaming state. For example, the stay stage in the probability variation gaming state is “night stage A” → “night stage B” → “night stage” You may comprise so that it may change like "C". As described above, the transition trigger may be the arrival of a predetermined number of fluctuations, the switching timing of the fluctuation mode determination table, or the like. Specifically, when the symbol variation is executed 20 times at “Night Stage A”, the stay stage transitions from “Night Stage A” to “Night Stage B”, and the symbol variation occurs at “Night Stage B”. When it is executed 40 times, the staying stage transitions from “night stage B” to “night stage C”. Note that the variation mode determination tables referred to at each stay stage may be the same or different. Further, the stay stage may be changed even in the “evening stage” or the “empty stage”. In such a case, it is preferable that the number of transitions is smaller than that in the “night stage”.

  By configuring as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state can be terminated depending on the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game. When the symbol variation has passed without winning the special game after the end, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state end simultaneously, and the probability variation gaming state precedes the time shortening gaming state. Interesting to transition to various gaming states as a result of the number of fluctuations since the end of the special game by having a case where it ends and a case where the time shortening gaming state ends before the probability varying gaming state It is possible to configure a gaming machine with a high level. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that various stay stages can be set depending on the gaming state, so that it is possible to provide an effect mode that does not bore the player.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the stay stage in the gaming machine in which the probability variation count and the time reduction count may be different is illustrated, but the configuration related to the stay stage is not limited only to the configuration of the present embodiment. Accordingly, the configuration of the stay stage different from that of the present embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 in FIG. 17 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is Step 2622 (Modification 1), that is, if it is determined in Step 2602 that the stay stage switching timing has been reached, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is determined in Step 2622 (Modification 1). Determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. If Yes in Step 2622 (Variant 1), the process proceeds to Step 2607, and if No, the process proceeds to Step 2616. With this configuration, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the stay stages of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are configured to be the same. ing. In the first modification from the present embodiment, when the special stage command is received, the stay stage is different from the case where the command is not received. You may comprise so that the stay stage of a variable game state and a time reduction game state and a non-stochastic change game state and a time reduction game state may always be the same. In addition, in the first modification from the present embodiment, regardless of the big hit symbol, after transitioning to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after transitioning to the big hit, and when transitioning to the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state However, this is not limited to this, and the transition to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state after the big hit is completed only when the number of time reductions given after the big hit ends is greater than the number of chances of change. In some cases, the stay stage may be the same for the non-stochastic game state and the time-shifted game state.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state end at the same time as in the present embodiment, and the probability In a configuration in which the variable gaming state ends before the time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state ends before the probability varying gaming state, various stay stages are set depending on the gaming state. The game is currently viewed from the player by being configured so that it can be the same stay stage in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the game is in an advantageous state or an unfavorable state, and the game can be progressed while always having a sense of expectation.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the stay stage in the gaming machine in which the probability variation count and the time reduction count may be different is illustrated, but the configuration related to the stay stage is not limited only to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the stay stage different from the present embodiment is referred to as the second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1411-1 (second) to step 1411-4 (second) and step 3200 (second), that is, the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined in step 1410. Thereafter, in step 1411-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1411-1 (second), in step 1411-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1411-2 (second), in step 1412, the main game table 3 is referred to determine the variation time related to the main game symbol. Even in the case of Yes in step 1411-2 (second), the limited frequency table 5 is referred to only for the five symbol variations, and the main game table 3 is referred to after the completion of the five symbol variations. It may be configured. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411-2 (second), in step 1411-3 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the stop symbol related to the main game random number, the result of lottery determination, the main game symbol Based on the limited frequency table 4, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  Further, in the case of No in step 1411-1 (second), in step 3200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1411-4 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the main game table 3 is not referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol, that is, in the limited frequency state, (1) the limited frequency counter value is 0. There are two cases: a case where it is larger, and a case (2) where the limited frequency counter value is 0 and the time-saving gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 (second) in FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. First, in step 3202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the count value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the first stage range (the limited frequency counter value that is the first stage in the limited frequency state having four stages). It is within the range, and it is determined whether 80 ≧ G> 75). In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the main game random number and the lottery result, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol. The process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1411-4 (second)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3202, in step 3206, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c within the second stage range (the second stage in the limited frequency state having four stages). It is determined whether or not 75 ≧ G> 1). In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2 on the basis of the random number on the main game side and the lottery result (variation time) related to the main game symbol (variation time). The process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1411-4 (second)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in other words, the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the third stage range (within the limited frequency counter value range that is the third stage in the limited frequency state having four stages). If G = 1), in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 3 based on the main game random number and the lottery result, and the variation mode related to the main game symbol (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1411-4 (second)}. As described above, in the second embodiment, after the big hit is completed, the state shifts to the limited frequency state, and the limited frequency state is configured to be capable of transitioning to a plurality of stages (three stages or four stages).

  Next, FIG. 26 is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 4. First, the limited frequency table 1 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 75). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The limited frequency table 1 is configured so that the average fluctuation time is the shortest compared to the limited frequency table 2, the limited frequency table 3, and the limited frequency table 4. The limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Next, the limited frequency table 2 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (75 ≧ G> 1). . The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average variation time as compared with the limited frequency table 1, the limited frequency table 3, and the limited frequency table 4. Further, the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average variation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

  Next, the limited frequency table 3 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (G = 1). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

  Next, the limited frequency table 4 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limited frequency counter value G is limited to a predetermined range (G = 0) and the gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. The frequency table 4 is referred to. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. The limited frequency table 4 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Note that the content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side is only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reserves (both on the first main game side and the second main game side). Otherwise, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holds, and on the second main game side, if the number of holds is a predetermined number or more, the number of holds It is desirable to have a relatively shorter variation time than when the number is less than or equal to the predetermined number.

  In the second embodiment, there are three or four kinds of limited frequency tables, and the order of “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3” or “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table”. 2 → Limited frequency table 3 → Limited frequency table 4 ”is configured to switch to three or four stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST, four-stage ST). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the order of the tables to be referenced is changed, there is no problem even if only three types of limited frequency tables are used. Furthermore, there are two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 1 as a three-stage ST mode. Also good.

Further, in a configuration in which the limited frequency table (limited frequency state) referred to in the probability variation gaming state (or time-reduced gaming state) transitions, the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency table 2 referring to the limited frequency table 1 are When the limited frequency state B is referred to,
(1) In the limited frequency state B, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that causes a loss when the number of reservations is the first number of reservations (for example, 0), and the number of reservations is the second number of reservations (for example, 3 The average value difference of a predetermined period arises with the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that becomes a loss in the case of the
(2) In the limited frequency state A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that causes a loss when the number of holds is the first number of holds (for example, 0), and the number of holds is the second number of holds (for example, 3 The average value difference of the predetermined period does not occur with the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that becomes a loss in the case of the
(3) The second hold number in the limited frequency state B (for example, 3) is the most selected than the variation time that is most likely to be lost in the second hold number (for example, 3) in the limited frequency state A. The fluctuation time that is likely to be lost is longer.
(4) The limited frequency state B stays for a longer period (number of fluctuations) than the limited frequency state A.
(5) The specific effects that can be displayed in the limited frequency state B are not displayed in the limited frequency state A.
(6) When the game is in the time-reduced game state, the prefetch effect related to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) Although there are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency state B, there is only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state B and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A are different in type.
You may comprise as follows. A plurality of these configurations may be combined, or only one may be applied. Each limited frequency state needs to stay for a period during which one or more symbol variations are executed (at least for a period during which one symbol variation is executed).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1560 (second), that is, after turning off the main game probability change flag in step 1558, in step 1560 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the probability change. The counter value of the continuous counter MP51c-2 is cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to step 1570. Here, in the second embodiment, when winning a jackpot in a probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined number of times, a so-called limiter machine that enters a non-probability variation gaming state after the predetermined number of jackpots ends. It is comprised so that it may become. Therefore, the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 for measuring the number of consecutive wins in the jackpot in the probability variation gaming state is cleared to zero at the timing when the probability variation gaming state ends.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (second) in FIG. 15 in the second embodiment. First, in the second embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only “5A · 5B · 7A · 7B”. First, in step 1784-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2. Next, in step 1784-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a counter value that causes the probability variation gaming state to end when the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches a specified value ( In the example, it is determined whether or not 4). In the case of Yes in step 1784-3, in step 1784-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1784-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) to the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1784-13.

  If NO in step 1784-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1784-6. As described above, in the second embodiment, by winning the jackpot, the probability variation continuous counter value is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot is over unless the probability variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value (the normal gaming state). After the jackpot won at the end of the game, all will be in the probability variation game state). Next, in step 1784-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M shifts the currently stopped jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol related to the terminated jackpot) to the number-limited probability variation jackpot symbol (after the jackpot ends, to the probability variation gaming state). However, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit symbol in which the number of short times given is 80, and in this example, it is 5A / 5B). In the case of Yes in step 1784-7, in step 1784-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the jackpot winning in the non-time-saving game state. In the case of Yes in step 1784-8, in step 1784-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value to the probability variation counter MP51c for a predetermined number of times (substantially the counter value does not become zero until the big hit is won). Yes, in this example, 65536 times) is set. In the second embodiment, the counter value is set in the probability variation counter MP51c so that the counter value does not become zero until the big hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special game ends. If the game state subsequently shifts to the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state may be continued until the next jackpot is won (the counter value may not be used). Next, in step 1784-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) to the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1784-13. On the other hand, if step 1784-7 or step 1784-8 is No, in step 1784-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the certain number of times in the probability variation counter MP51c (substantially 0 until the big hit is won). In this example, the counter value is set to 65536 times (infinite times may be set). Next, in step 1784-12, the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the short-time counter MP52c for a predetermined number of times B (substantially the counter value does not become zero until the big hit is won. In this example, , 65536 times, or an infinite number of times may be set), and the flow proceeds to step 1784-13.

  Next, in step 1784-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MN52c (a big win is won in the situation where the counter value remains). If it does, it will be cleared to zero). Next, in step 1784-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag. Next, in step 1784-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). In this way, in the second embodiment, the predetermined number of times B (a counter value that does not become 0 until the big hit is won, which is 65536 times) is set as the probability variation counter value. The probability variation gaming state continues until the next big hit, and after the limited frequency counter value becomes 0, the limited frequency state (refer to the limited frequency table 4) is set. In addition, in the second embodiment, after the big hit, when the transition to the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state is made, the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state substantially continue until the next big hit (65536 times). ) And a case where the game ends with a predetermined number of symbol variations (80 times), and when the game shifts to the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state after the big hit, the non-stochastic game state and the time is shortened. Only when the gaming state ends with a predetermined number (80 times) of symbol variation. In addition, when the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are entered after the big hit, the rate at which the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state continue substantially until the next big hit is after the end of the big hit on the first main game side. Than after the big hit on the second main game side (for example, 40% of the big hit on the first main game side is a probability hit game state and a time-reduced gaming state that continues substantially until the next big hit. And 60% of the big hit on the second main game side may be a big hit in which the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state continue until the next big hit). The winning jackpot will be a jackpot where the probability-changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will continue substantially until the next big hit, after the big hit, than the jackpot won in the non-time-saving gaming state (for example, 70% of the jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state is a jackpot where the probability-changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the next jackpot, and 30% of the jackpot winning in the non-time-saving gaming state May be a big hit in which the probability variation gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the next big hit). In addition, when the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state substantially continue until the next big hit, the probability variation gaming state and the predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times) after the big hit ends, and The variation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 until the predetermined number of symbol variations when the time-reduced gaming state is completed, and after the completion, the variation is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 4. The mode change is determined, that is, when the probability variation gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state are terminated by a predetermined number of symbol variations (80 times in this example) after the jackpot ends, The limited frequency table to be referred to is different between before the end and after the end. Further, when the limited frequency table 4 is referred to, the big hit expectation degree when the reach fluctuation occurs (in this example, by the fluctuation of the symbol that has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more than when the other tables are referred to). Since the reach fluctuation is executed, the expectation of big hit when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more is assumed to be relatively high (the fluctuation mode determination table in which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is not selected is compared). Not) Similarly, the occurrence frequency of the prefetch effect that causes a loss may be configured to be relatively low when the limited frequency table 4 is referenced.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 of FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2116 (second) to step 2122 (second), step 2650 (second), step 2700 (second), and step 2750 (second), that is, step 2106. In step 2118 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2118 (second), in step 2650 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a first main game winning prefetch process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2120 (second). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2118 (second), in step 2700 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a second main game winning prefetch process, which will be described later, and step 2120 (second). Migrate to

  Next, in step 2120 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2120 (second), in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prefetch hold content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2122 (second). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2120 (second), the process proceeds to step 2122 (second). Next, in step 2122 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the hold display mode other than the trigger hold is “white”, and proceeds to step 2116 (second). Next, in step 2116 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S lights up the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value in the determined hold display mode, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the prohibition process of the former look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a second main game hold (holding that is preferentially consumed over the first main game side) within the hold. It is determined whether or not it exists. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that is won in the pre-read lottery at the time of winning a prize (the pre-read lottery at the time of the first main game winning a prize, the pre-read lottery at the time of the second main game winning a prize). In the case of Yes in step 2658, in step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold. In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2161, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S can digest the new hold in the same game state as the current game state (the game state transitions until the new hold is consumed). Whether or not there is a plan to do so) If Yes in step 2661, the process proceeds to step 2662. As described above, the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is executed in the non-time-reduced gaming state and is not executed in the time-reduced gaming state. Note that the pre-reading effect on the second main game side, which will be described later, is executed in the time-reduced game state and is not executed in the non-time-reduced game state. Since it is configured in this way, when comparing the prefetching effect on the first main game side and the prefetching effect on the second main game side, the prefetching effect on the first main game side is in a non-time-reduced gaming state. The pre-reading effect on the second main game side is compared with the case of the time-saving game state. In the second embodiment, when the game state transitions at the timing when a new hold is consumed, the prefetch effect is not executed (the prefetch effect does not straddle the game state), in other words, a new hold is generated. Configured not to trigger hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of prefetching effects may be provided, and a prefetching prefetching effect that can be executed across the gaming state and a prefetching effect that does not straddle the gaming state may be provided. Specifically, it has a hold change prefetch effect (prefetch effect in which the display mode of the hold changes) as a prefetch prefetch effect that can be executed across game states, and a background change prefetch as a prefetch effect that does not cross the game state. It may be configured to have an effect (a pre-reading effect in which the background effect changes) (having a background change pre-reading effect as a pre-reading pre-production that can be executed across the gaming state and does not cross the gaming state) It may be configured to have a pending change prefetch effect as the prefetch effect). In addition, as the gaming state in the case of executing the pre-reading effect across the gaming state, when the transition is made from the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the gaming state is straddled. A pre-reading effect can be executed, but straddles other gaming states (for example, a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state to a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening A configuration in which a prefetch effect cannot be executed from a gaming state to a probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state to a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, etc. May be.

  Next, in the processing related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2662, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2662, in step 2664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning look-ahead lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new hold, and in step 2674. Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2662, in step 2668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the new hold to be a long fluctuation (a hold having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is a long fluctuation). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2668, in step 2670, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning look-ahead lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example), and proceeds to step 2675. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2668, the process proceeds to step 2673. In step 2668, it may be configured to determine whether or not the new hold is a hold corresponding to a reach effect or a hold corresponding to a variation pattern serving as an SP reach effect.

  Next, in step 2673, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2673, in step 2676, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds the information indicating “trigger hold” to the new hold selected in the winning look-ahead lottery and temporarily stores it. The process proceeds to {process of step 2120 (second)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652 (when there is a hold on the second main game side in the hold), in step 2678, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is temporarily stored in the RAM on the sub control board S side. Information indicating that the trigger is on hold is deleted from the information related to the hold being held (if there is no hold in the hold that has information indicating that the trigger is on hold, this processing is not executed and the next process is executed. ), The process proceeds to the next process {step 2120 (second) process}. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2654, step 2658, step 2660, step 2661 or step 2673, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2120 (second) process}. In the process of step 2678, when there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence), in the second main game side preferential digestion gaming machine as in the second embodiment, the newly generated second This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is not normally executed because the reservation on the main game side is digested first, so that the planned fluctuation order is not achieved. In this example, when the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is executed, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time-reduced gaming state (open time extension function is not activated). In the non-time-reduced gaming state (when the opening time extension function is in operation), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the first main game side. In addition, a plurality of trigger suspensions may be generated, and a suspension change may be performed simultaneously on two or more suspensions. In addition, it is not limited to executing the hold change only at the timing when the trigger hold occurs, and is configured to execute the hold change in the period from when the trigger hold occurs until the trigger hold is digested. (For example, at the start of the next change when the trigger hold occurs, during the change of the next change when the trigger hold occurs, when the change of the next change occurs when the trigger hold occurs, when the next change starts when the trigger hold occurs, or when the trigger hold In the middle of the next fluctuation that occurs, during the next fluctuation stop when the trigger hold occurs, the timing after the next fluctuation stop when the trigger hold occurs, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) in FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the prohibition process of the former look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2707, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S can digest the new hold in the same game state as the current game state (the game state shifts until the new hold is consumed) Whether or not there is a plan to do so). If Yes in step 2707, the process moves to step 2708.

  Next, in the process relating to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning look-ahead lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new hold, and in step 2720 Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2708, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the new hold to be a long fluctuation (a hold having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is a hold having a long fluctuation). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a winning look-ahead lottery for winning with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new hold, step 2720 Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2720. In step 2712, it may be configured to determine whether or not the new hold is a hold corresponding to the reach effect or a hold corresponding to the variation pattern serving as the SP reach effect.

  Next, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2720, in step 2722, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds the information indicating “trigger hold” to the new hold selected in the winning look-ahead lottery and temporarily stores it. The process proceeds to {process of step 2120 (second)}. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2702, step 2704, step 2706, step 2707, or step 2220, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2120 (second) process}. As described above, in the second embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the prefetch lottery on the second main game side can be won, while the prefetch lottery on the first main game side is not won. In the time-reduced game state, the pre-drawing lottery on the first main game side can be won while the pre-drawing lottery on the second main game side is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the state where the opening time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (the open time extending function is activated), the second main game The pre-read lottery on the first main game side can be won while the pre-draw lottery on the first main game side is not won, and the opening time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is not relatively extended (open time extension function In a state in which is not operating), it may be configured such that the prefetch lottery on the first main game side can be won while the prefetch lottery on the second main game side is not won. In addition, in the description according to this example, in the case of a configuration that has different actions in the time shortening gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the state in which the opening time extension function is in operation and the opening time extension function in operation There is no problem even if it is replaced with a configuration that acts differently in the state where it is not. In this example, as described above, when the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is executed, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time-reduced game state (open time extension function non- In the non-time-reduced gaming state (open time extension function non-actuated), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the first main game side. In addition, when the pre-reading effect on the second main game side is executed, it is a condition that the game is in the time-reduced game state (open time extension function is in operation), and the time-reduction game state (open time extension function) During operation), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the second main game side. Since it is configured in this manner, when comparing the look-ahead effect in the time-reduced gaming state (when the open time extension function is activated) and the look-ahead effect in the non-time-reduced game state (the open time extension function is activated) The first main game in the pre-play effect (or matters related to pre-read such as pre-read lottery) in the second main game side in the shortened game state (open time extension function is activated) and the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function is activated) It may be compared with the prefetching effect on the side (or matters related to prefetching such as prefetching lottery).

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) in FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the display mode of the b trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and performs the next process {step 2122 ( 2)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2752, in step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the display mode of the trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), and performs the next process {step 2122 (Second)}.

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). In the second embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when determining the display mode of the trigger hold that can change when the hold change effect is executed with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is “rainbow color”. ”,“ Red ”,“ green ”, and“ blue ”, and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (when lost) are“ red ”,“ “Green” and “Blue”, which are drawn by random numbers dedicated to determining the hold display mode. It should be noted that “red” is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and “blue” is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (when lost). , The jackpot expectation for each display mode of holding when the hold change effect occurs (the ratio of the appearance rate of the big hit change to the total appearance rate of the big hit change and the loss change) is “rainbow “Color” is selected only at the time of big hit, and colors other than “rainbow” are in order of “red”, “green”, and “blue” in descending order of expectation of big hit. It should be noted that the display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type is changed or the color that can be changed is changed, for example, when the open extension function is inactive rather than when the open time extension function is operated. It may be configured such that the number of types of on-hold display modes increases (or in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state) than in the probability variation gaming state and the time-reduction gaming state. The configuration is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the selection ratio of the hold display mode is changed. For example, in the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), “red: blue” = “300: 324” In the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), “red: blue” = “100: 624”, “blue” is easier to select than “red” regardless of the result, but at the time of big hit You may comprise so that the difference at the time of a loss may become larger with the difference of the selection rate of the hold display mode which concerns, and the difference of the selection rate of the hold display mode which concerns at the time of a loss. Also, in this example, the display color of the hold is configured to suggest the expectation that the symbol variation related to the trigger hold becomes a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit (or The game state after the execution of the special game may be suggested in combination with the degree of expectation that is a big hit. In such a configuration, particularly in the probability variation gaming state, the display color of the suspension suggests the expectation degree to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big hit in the suspension. (For example, if the hold display color is “red”, the probability change probability is high, and if it is “blue”, the probability change probability is low, etc.), is the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player continued? It is possible to execute an effective performance that asks whether to end.

  In this example, the hold display mode is configured to be displayed in a display color other than “white” at the timing when the trigger hold occurs, but is not limited to this, and a notice is given as a hold change effect. An effect may be executed and the hold display mode may change (for example, the character takes action on the effect display device SG, and the trigger hold display mode changes from “white” to “blue”). . Note that the execution timing of the hold change effect may be configured to be executed at various timings such as a symbol variation start timing, a symbol variation end timing, and a symbol variation timing.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed (in this example, when the trigger hold is generated), the big hit expectation is determined according to the display mode selected from the multiple display modes of the hold. It is configured to be different. Further, it may be configured such that a plurality of hold change effects can be executed for a certain hold during execution of the prefetch effect (from the timing of winning the prefetch lottery to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). . For example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during execution of the prefetch effect, when the display mode of hold that changes in the first hold change effect is “blue”, The display mode of the hold that changes in the second hold change effect is set to “green” or “red”, that is, the hold display mode changes to a hold display mode with a high expectation level every time the hold change effect is executed. (Rank up) is desirable (in order not to impair the player's expectation). In addition, the effect related to the change in the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not involve the change in the hold display may be provided. There may be provided an effect form (so-called gas pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is, and an effect form in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

  In the second embodiment, the hold change effect is configured to be executable in both the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. The pre-reading effect can be executed. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, but a look-ahead effect that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state but is not executed in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, and the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming There may be provided a prefetch effect that can be executed in the state but is not executed in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Also, a prefetch effect A is provided as a prefetch effect that can be executed in a plurality of different game states or a prefetch effect that can be executed across a plurality of different game states, and a prefetch effect that cannot be executed in different game states or different When prefetching effect B is provided as a prefetching effect that cannot be executed across a plurality of gaming states, (1) the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are the same stay (2) The occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the prefetch effect A is different, (3) The big hit expectation degree of the prefetch effect A is different, (4) The occurrence rate of the prefetch effect A that is lost is different. You may comprise as follows. In the case where the prefetch effect is executed in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the prefetching effect is related to the second main game side. In addition, you may apply at least 1 or more structure for the structure of said (1)-(4).

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in Step 2661 of FIG. 30 and Step 2707 of FIG. 31 described above, the gaming state when a new hold that has occurred is digested and the occurrence of the new hold is generated. Different from the gaming state (for example, when the new hold occurs, it is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state, and when the new hold is consumed, the gaming state is a non-stochastic variable gaming state and a time-saving In the gaming state, the trigger hold is not generated, that is, the pre-reading effect is not executed across the gaming state. In addition, it is not limited to such a configuration, as described above, a prefetch effect A is provided as a prefetch effect that can be executed in a plurality of different game states or a prefetch effect that can be executed across a plurality of different game states, The prefetch effect B may be provided as a prefetch effect that cannot be executed in a plurality of different game states or a prefetch effect that cannot be executed across a plurality of different game states.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 of FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2622 (second), that is, when the stay stage switching timing is reached in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is currently in step 2622 (second). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2622 (second), “night stage” is set as the stay stage in step 2610, and in the case of No, the process of setting the stay stage in the non-time-reduced gaming state in the process after step 2616 is performed. Run. Thus, in the second embodiment, the “night stage” that is the same stay stage is set in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. Yes. In the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined number of times (in this example, three times), the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state after the predetermined number of jackpots have ended. Therefore, it is recognized that the transition to the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state which is disadvantageous for the player than the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is achieved. It is hard to be done, and it is configured to maintain a sense of expectation. In the second embodiment, the stay stage is configured to be the “night stage” in the time reduction gaming state. However, the stay stage in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state is “night stage”. ”And a star is displayed, and the stay stage when the non-stochastic game state and the time reduction game state are“ night stage ”and no star is displayed, etc., the time reduction game state is the same. However, the display mode may be made different depending on whether the game mode is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, even in the case of a gaming machine having various stay stages, even when the prefetch effect is configured to be executable, the gaming state and the stay stage It is configured so that an appropriate pre-reading effect corresponding to the switching can be executed, and if the winning jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined number of times, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpots Even if it is configured to shift to the state, it is advantageous and disadvantageous for the player by making the same stay stage in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. By configuring the state so as to be difficult to distinguish, it is possible to achieve a game that does not make the player bored.

  In the second embodiment, after the big hit, the same limited frequency is used in both the case of the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state and the case of the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. Therefore, the timing (limited frequency transition timing) at which the limited frequency table to be referred to is switched is the same. The limited frequency tables referred to in such a case may be the same, but different limited frequency tables may be referred to in order to make the occurrence frequency of reach effects different.

  In this example, it may be configured so that the prefetch effect can be executed even during execution of the big hit. For example, there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold existing at a predetermined timing during the big hit execution. For this, an effect (so-called on-hold consecutive resort effect) for notifying the player that there is a big hit in the hold may be executed. In addition, the on-hold consecutive resort production may be configured to be able to be executed even during the jackpot execution that is won in the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state (winning in the probability-change game state and the time-reduced game state). Can also be executed during the jackpot execution).

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In addition, in 2nd Embodiment, it comprised so that it might become a game machine which has a variation in the fluctuation | variation aspect of a main game symbol by being comprised so that it may transfer to a limited frequency state after completion | finish of a special game, A gaming machine having such a limited frequency state is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration having a limited frequency state different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Note that the first modification from the second embodiment includes a limited frequency counter AMN 52c-1 and a limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 as limited frequency counters.

  First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 6 in the first modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1440 (second modification 1) to step 1443 (second modification 1), step 3300 (second modification 1) and step 3350 (second modification 1). After determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in step 1410, in step 1440 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is zero. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1440 (second variation 1), in step 1441 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is zero. . In the case of Yes in step 1441 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1412, and the variation mode related to the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3.

  Further, in the case of No in step 1440 (second variation 1), in step 3300 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. Further, in the case of No in step 1441 (second variation 1), in step 3350 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency B variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1443 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. Although details will be described later, the first modification from the second embodiment has a plurality of limited frequency states.

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of Step 3300 (second variation 1) of FIG. 34 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 3302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is within the first stage range (the limited frequency counter which is the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is within the range of the counter value of A, and it is determined whether 100 ≧ GA> 20). In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A1 based on the main game random number and the result of lottery determination, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. The process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1442 (second modification 1)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 3302, in Step 3306, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 within the second stage range (2 in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency counter A at the stage and 20 ≧ GA> 1). In the case of Yes in step 3306, in step 3308, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A2 based on the random number on the main game side, the lottery result, the number of holds, and the variation mode related to the main game symbol ( Fluctuating time) is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 1442 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3306, in other words, the count value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is within the third stage range (the limited frequency counter A that is the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of the counter value and GA = 1), in step 3310, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A3 based on the random number on the main game side and the lottery result. The variation mode (variation time) related to the game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {the processing of Step 1442 (second variation 1)}.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (second variation 1) in FIG. 34 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is within the first stage range (the limited frequency counter which is the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is within the range of the counter value of B, and it is determined whether 80 ≧ GB> 21). In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B1 based on the random number on the main game side and the lottery result, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. Is transferred to the next process {the process of step 1443 (second variation 1)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3352, in step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is within the second stage range (2 in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency counter B at the stage and GB = 21). In the case of Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B2 based on the random number on the main game side and the lottery result, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. Is transferred to the next process {the process of step 1443 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3356, in other words, the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is within the third stage range (the limited frequency counter B which is the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of the counter value and GB ≦ 20), in step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B3 based on the random number on the main game side, the lottery result, and the number of holds. Then, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {the processing of Step 1443 (second variation 1)}. Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of limited frequency states (the limited frequency state A where the limited frequency counter A is subtracted) and the limited frequency state B where the limited frequency counter B is subtracted. And when the limited frequency state is different, the timing (limited frequency transition timing) for switching the limited frequency table to be referred to is different.

  Next, FIG. 37 is an example of the limited frequency tables A1 to A3 and B1 to B3 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the limited frequency table A1 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 1 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table A2 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 2 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table A3 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 3 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B1 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 1 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B2 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 3 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B3 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 2 in the second embodiment. The contents of the table related to the game state will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (second variation 1) of FIG. 15 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1785-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times (80 in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1785-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the currently stopped big hit symbol is a long and short number of big hit symbols (a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of short times given, in this example 7A -It is determined whether it is 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1785-4, in step 1785-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long and short number of times (relatively large number of short and long times, 100 times in this example) to the hour / minute number counter MP52c. To do. Next, in step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1, and proceeds to step 1785-10. The limited frequency counter value is configured to be cleared to zero when a special game is won.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1785-4, in other words, the big hit symbol that is stopped is a short hit / short hit big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with a relatively small number of short hits when given, in this example, 5A / 5B) If there is, in step 1785-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the short time and short number of times (60 times in this example) in the short time number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1785-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2, and proceeds to step 1785-10. The limited frequency counter value is configured to be cleared to zero when a special game is won. Next, in steps 1785-10 and 1785-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short flag and the main game short flag, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1997). In the first modification from the second embodiment, the winning combination is determined according to the type of jackpot symbol or according to the gaming state when the jackpot is made (whether the open time extension function is activated) or to the jackpot on the first main game side. Depending on whether or not the big hit on the second main game side is won, the tendency of the limited frequency state after the big hit may be different, and in such a case, the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, it may be determined whether the limited frequency state A or the limited frequency state B is set, and may be either the limited frequency state A or the limited frequency state B (for example, The second main game side or the time-reduced game state is more likely to shift to the limited frequency state where the number of time reductions is larger).

  As described above, the first modification from the second embodiment is configured such that the number of time reductions given after the jackpot related to the jackpot symbol is different depending on the jackpot symbol. Further, when the number of time reductions is larger than the number of times of probability change, a predetermined value is set in the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1, that is, the state shifts to the limited frequency state A. In this case, a predetermined value is set in the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-1, that is, the limited frequency state B is entered.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, it is configured to have a plurality of types of transition modes of the limited frequency state and the limited frequency state, and depending on the jackpot symbol, By making the limited frequency state after the big hit end and the transition mode of the limited frequency state different, it can be a more interesting gaming machine. Further, like the configuration of the present embodiment, the number of times of probability variation and the number of time reductions can be different, and there are cases where the number of time reductions is less than the number of times of probability variation and cases where the number of time reductions is greater than the number of times of probability variation due to the big hit design. Such a configuration, and the configuration in which the limited frequency state and the transition mode of the limited frequency state are different in the two cases will further enhance the interest of the game.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the number of time reductions is greater than the number of probability changes, the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (the number of times of switching the limited frequency table to be referenced). ) Is one time, but the number of limited frequency transitions in the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced gaming state is 2, which is less than the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced gaming state. The number of limited frequency transitions in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is larger. In addition, when the number of time reductions is less than the number of times of probability change, the number of limited frequency transitions (number of times to switch the limited frequency table to be referenced) in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state is one, while non-stochastic variation games The number of limited frequency transitions in the state and time-reduced gaming state is 0 (the game state is never entered), and the non-stochastic variation is more than the limited frequency transition number in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. The number of limited frequency transitions in the gaming state and the reduced time gaming state is smaller. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the number of limited frequency transitions in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is always higher than the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. It may be configured to increase, or the number of limited frequency transitions in non-stochastic variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state is less than the number of limited frequency transition times in probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state May be. Further, the difference between the limited frequency transition in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the limited frequency transition in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is not limited only to the limited frequency count. The number of times of transition to a limited frequency state where the occurrence frequency of reach fluctuations (for example, symbol fluctuations having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more) is different or the period of staying in the limited frequency state where the occurrence frequency of reach fluctuations is high are different. May be.

  Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the final variation (60th variation after the end of the big hit) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state when the number of time reductions is less than the probability variation number is all 5 seconds variation. In contrast to the time being selected, the final variation (60th variation after the end of jackpot) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state when the number of time reductions is greater than the certain number of variation is selected from 1 second or 3 seconds. The variation time (the average value of selected variation times) of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is different depending on whether the number of time reductions is less than the probability variation number or less. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that the difference in the final variation between the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is not limited to this when the number of time reductions is larger or smaller than the certain variation number. (1) The variation time determination table is (3) selected whether or not to execute an effect that tells the player whether or not the difference can be made depending on the number of holds, (2) whether the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will end The longest variation time to be obtained may be different, and (4) the shortest time to be selected may be different.

  In addition, in the second embodiment and the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the distribution game execution round in the special game execution (when the game ball enters the specific area C22, the game proceeds to the probability variation game state after the special game ends. A configuration may be adopted in which a game ball enters the specific area C22 in a round in which a transition is made, so that a transition to the probability-variable game state is made after the special game is over (so-called ball check machine).

  Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the limited frequency transition number is different depending on whether the number of time reductions is greater or less than the probability variation number in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence frequency of reach fluctuation, the appearance rate of the fluctuation time exceeding the predetermined time, the appearance rate of the fluctuation time falling below the predetermined time, etc. may be different. (1) Applicable only to the second main game side, (2) Applicable only to symbol variations that result in a loss, and (3) Applicable only to symbol variations that result in a loss and the second main game. May be. In addition, the limitations (1) to (3) are not limited to the comparison between the case where the number of time reductions is greater than the number of times of probability variation and the case where the number of times is less than the number of probability changes. It is supplemented that the limitations of (1) to (3) may be applied to the comparison of modes (variation time, fluctuation trend) and the comparison of production modes (production trends).

Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the following configuration may be applied.
(1) The variation mode determination table referred to in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state and the variation mode determination table referred to in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state are configured in the same table contents.
(2) The variation mode determination table referred to in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state and the variation mode determination table referred to in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state are configured as different table contents.

(Third embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is configured to enhance the interest in the time-saving gaming state by configuring it to have a plurality of types of time-saving times after the end of the special game, but the gaming property related to the time-saving gaming state is implemented in this embodiment. It is not limited only to the configuration of the form. Therefore, the configuration of the time-saving gaming state different from the present embodiment is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 39 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of a gaming machine in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the third embodiment, two first main game start ports, a first main game start port AA10 in the center of the game area and a first main game start port BA12 on the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area). Is provided. In addition, the game ball that the player performs left-handed and flows down the left side of the game area (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start opening AA10 and is difficult to be guided to other entrances. The game balls that are right-handed by the player and flow down the right side of the game area (referenced to the center of the game area) are the distribution entrance C20, the second main game start B10, the first main The game start port BA12, the auxiliary game start port H10, and the big prize winning port C10 are easily guided to the first main game start port AA10. Furthermore, the game balls in which the player makes a right strike and flows down the right side of the game area (referenced to the center of the game area) are the distribution entry port C20, the second main game start port B10, and the first main game start port BA12. The auxiliary game start opening H10 and the special winning opening C10 flow down in this order. Further, the first main game start opening BA12 is provided with a first non-electrical accessory A12hd. When the first non-electrical accessory A12hd is in a closed state, a game ball is placed in the first main game start opening BA12. It is difficult to enter the ball, and when the first non-electrical accessory A12hd is in the open state, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first main game start opening BA12. The second main game start opening B10 is provided with a second non-electrical accessory B10hd. When the second non-electrical accessory B10hd is in a closed state, the game ball is in the second main game start opening B10. When the second non-electric accessory B10hd is in an open state, the game ball is configured to easily enter the second main game start port B10. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively. In the third embodiment, only one big prize opening is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two big prize openings may be provided. The game flow of the third embodiment is a left-handed (a game method in which a game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game board surface in a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state. The game ball is launched with a relatively weak launch strength), and other game states (probability variation game state and time shortening game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state) Is a game method in which a game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the game board, and the game ball is launched with a relatively strong launch strength. Has been.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a view showing the internal structure of the sorting entrance C20 according to the third embodiment. In the distribution entrance C20, the first non-electric entry A12hd is opened when a game ball enters the first open entrance C22 (first open entrance entrance detection device). C22s), a second open entrance C23 (second open entrance entrance detection device C23s) in which the second non-electrical accessory B10hd is opened when a game ball enters, There is a sorting member C24 that distributes the game balls that have entered the ball opening C20 to the first opening entrance C22 and the second opening entrance C23.

  First, the action in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail. When the sorting member C24 is in the first mode, it is swung to the right so as to close the flow path to the second open entrance C23. The game balls that have entered the distribution entrance C20 are configured to easily enter the first open entrance C22 and are difficult to enter the second open entrance C23. Next, the operation in the lower part of the figure will be described in detail. When the sorting member C24 is in the second mode, it is swung to the left so as to close the flow path to the first opening entrance C22. The game balls that have entered the distribution entrance C20 are difficult to enter the first opening entrance C22 and are easy to enter the second opening entrance C23. Further, as will be described later, the distribution member is configured to start driving from the first opening timing when the electric accessory D10d is opened, and is driven as “first mode → second mode → first mode”. Has been.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main game board M according to the third embodiment. First, the changes from the present embodiment are step 1800 (third) to step 1900 (third) in the timer interrupt processing, that is, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs special game control. After the process is executed, in step 1800 (third), a sorting member drive control process, which will be described later, is executed. Next, in step 1850 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first non-electrical accessory drive control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1900 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second non-electrical accessory drive control process described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is the content of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table, that is, the release mode of the electric accessory. In the third embodiment, the auxiliary game short flag is used as the auxiliary game short flag. Two types of auxiliary game short time flags, A and auxiliary game short time flag B, are provided. Further, the opening mode of the auxiliary game electric accessory D10d is different depending on the type of the auxiliary game short time flag that is turned on. With this configuration, the auxiliary game short time flag that is turned on is configured. The timing at which the game ball enters the distribution entrance ball opening C20 can be made different, and the game ball enters the first open entrance entrance C22 and the second open entrance entrance C23 in accordance with the driving of the distribution member C24. Can be distributed (details will be described later). Specifically, when the auxiliary game short flag A is ON, the opening mode of the electric accessory D10d is “3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → “0.2 second open → closed”, and a 3.0 second open (long open) in which the game ball can easily enter is the first half of the open period. When the auxiliary game short flag B is ON, the opening mode of the electric accessory D10d is “0.2 second open → 0.2 second closed → 0.2 second open → 3.0 second closed → 4. “0 second release”, and 4.0 second release (long release), which makes it easy for a game ball to enter, is the latter half of the release period. It should be noted that the long release period is longer when the auxiliary game short flag B is on than when the auxiliary game short flag A is on, and the total open time is also short. The case where the auxiliary game time short flag B is on is longer than the case where the flag A is on. At the same time, the driving mode of the sorting member C24 is “3.6 second first mode (guided to the first open entrance C22) → 4.0 second mode (guided to the second open entrance C23)” It has become. With this configuration, when the auxiliary game short flag A is on, the ball enters the first open entrance C22, and when the auxiliary game short flag B is on, the ball enters the second open entrance C22. It is configured to In this example, when the auxiliary game short time flag (auxiliary game short time flag A and auxiliary game short time flag B) is off, the winning probability on the auxiliary game side may be 0 (no win). In such a configuration, a random number for determining the auxiliary game variation time may be acquired and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol may be determined based on the random number. In addition, in the same auxiliary game side game state (auxiliary game short flag A ON, auxiliary game short flag B ON, auxiliary game short flag A and auxiliary game short flag B OFF) You may comprise so that it may have more than one, and you may comprise so that it may have only one candidate of the variation time of an auxiliary game symbol in the game state of all the auxiliary games. In such a configuration, it may be configured not to provide a random number for determining the auxiliary game variation time.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display device according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 10 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3150 (third), that is, after the variable flag is turned off in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M is described later in step 3150 (third). The promotion count control process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 1550.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the promotion count control process according to the subroutine of step 3150 (third) in FIG. 43 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3152, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag. Next, in step 3156, the CPUMC of the main control board M conceals that it is in the probability variation gaming state in the period from the end of the special game until the predetermined number of symbol variations elapses. In order to notify that the game state is the probability variation gaming state at the timing when the number of symbol variations have elapsed, the counter for measuring the symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is cleared to zero. Next, in step 3158, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the promotion count flag (the flag that will execute the above-described promotion counter measurement when it is on), and proceeds to step 3160. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3152, the process proceeds to step 3160.

  Next, in step 3160, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the promotion count flag (which is turned on in step 1764) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3160, in step 3162, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the stage promotion counter. Next, in step 3164, the CPU MC of the main control board M has a stage promotion counter value equal to the stage switching value {the number of time reductions after the big hit end related to the non-probable big hit symbol (2A, 2B). Then, it is determined whether or not 10}. In the case of Yes in step 3164, in step 3166, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a stage promotion command (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the next process The process proceeds to (Step 1550). It should be noted that if the answer is No in step 3160 or step 3164, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 43 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is Step 1569 (third) and Step 1578 (third), that is, the CPUMC of the main control board M is turned off in Step 1569 (third). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1569 (third), the process proceeds to step 1570, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600). In step 1576, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short flag, and then in step 1578 (third), the auxiliary game short flag (auxiliary game short flag A / auxiliary game short flag B). Is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the transition is made to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished, the probability variation gaming state can be maintained until the next jackpot is won (elapsed number of symbol variation times). Does not end the probability variation gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1604 (third), that is, when the condition device operation flag is on in step 1602, in step 1604 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M Turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag A / auxiliary game short flag B) and proceeds to step 1606.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the completion of the specific game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 15 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a jackpot symbol in which the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is shifted to the probability variation jackpot symbol (the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, 3A, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1754 and proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1752 (when the stop symbols are 2A and 2B), the process proceeds to step 1756.

  Next, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a short-time A big hit symbol (a big hit symbol in which the auxiliary game short-time flag A is turned on after the special game ends, 3A)? Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1756, the auxiliary game short flag A is turned on in step 1758, and the process proceeds to step 1768. If NO in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a big hit symbol in which the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a short-time B big hit symbol (the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on after the special game is ended) in step 1760. 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short flag B in step 1762. As described above, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game short time flag that is turned on after the special game related to the big hit symbol may be different depending on the stopped big hit symbol (the auxiliary game short flag A and the auxiliary game short flag B). Any one of them is turned on), that is, the time-saving gaming state can be different. Hereinafter, a state in which the auxiliary game short time flag A is on may be referred to as a time shortening gaming state A, and a state in which the auxiliary game short time flag B is on may be referred to as a time shortening gaming state B. Next, in step 1763, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a revival jackpot symbol (the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, but a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit symbol that will conceal that the player is in the probability variation gaming state until the symbol variation elapses and is 5A, 5B). In the case of Yes in Step 1763, in Step 1764, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the promotion count flag (a flag for measuring the number of times of change from the end of the special game referred to when changing the stay stage). Then, the process proceeds to step 1768. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1763, the process proceeds to step 1768. If No in step 1760 (when the stop symbol is 2A or 2B), in step 1765, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (10 in this example) to the hourly number counter. Next, in step 1766, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short flag B, and proceeds to step 1768. It should be noted that in the two states, when the promotion count flag is turned on at step 1764 and when the predetermined value (10 times in this example) is set to the time reduction counter MP52c at step 1765, the same applies after the special game ends. As an effect, the player is configured to execute an effect asking whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. Here, if the opening mode of the electric power tool is different between the two states, it is determined by the player whether or not the current probability variation gaming state is set regardless of the result of the performance. In order to prevent such a situation, the third embodiment is configured to turn on the auxiliary game short time flag B in any of the two states. Next, in step 1768, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing {step 1800 (third processing)}. Thus, in the third embodiment, whether the auxiliary game short time flag A is turned on or the auxiliary game short time flag B is turned on as the auxiliary game short time flag (the time shortening game state A or the time shortening game state B). It is configured to be determined by the type of jackpot symbol (does not depend on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning), and depending on the type of jackpot symbol, the transition to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state A There are a case where a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state B and a case where the transition is made to the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state B. In this example, after the big hit end related to “2A · 2B”, which is a big hit symbol that becomes a non-stochastic variable gaming state after the big hit ends, the non-stochastic variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state B are configured. After the jackpot related to “2A · 2B”, the non-stochastic game state A and the time-reduced game state A may be set. It should be noted that the non-stochastic game state A and the time-reduced game state A may be configured even after the jackpot relating to “5A · 5B” ends.

  In the third embodiment, the rate at which the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on after the end of the special game, in other words, the rate at which the time-reduced game state B is set after the end of the special game is the end of the special game on the first main game side. The following is “524/1024”, after the special game on the second main game side is “1024/1024”, and after the special game on the second main game side is over, the special game on the first main game side is It is configured so that the rate of time-saving game state B is higher than after the end (and the time-reduced game after the special game on the second main game side is completed than after the special game on the first main game side is completed) In other words, after the end of the special game on the second main game side is shifted to the time-saving game state than after the end of the special game on the first main game side Has a high percentage of time-saving gaming state B Ratio is a time reduction gaming state A is low) as configuration. It should be noted that after the special game ends, the ratio of the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state B is “324/1024” after the special game on the first main game side ends, and after the special game on the second main game side ends Is “824/1024”, and is configured such that after the special game on the second main game side ends, the ratio of the time-saving game state B is higher than after the special game on the first main game side ends. The number of execution rounds per jackpot in the third embodiment is the same as that of the present embodiment. “2B · 5B” is “2R”, “2A · 3A · 5A · 7A” is “4R”, and “7B” is “ 16R ". The average value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot on the first main game side is “2R × 200/1024 + 4R × 824/1024 = 3.61R”, and the average value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot on the second main game side is Since “2R × 200/1024 + 4R × 50/1024 + 16R × 774/1024 = 12.67R”, the average value of the number of execution rounds is larger for the second main game side big hit than for the first main game side big hit. Is increasing, that is, the expected value of the number of winning balls in the big hit is increasing. Similarly, when comparing the probability variation jackpots that will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot end, the average number of execution rounds in the probability variation jackpot on the first main game side is “4R × 824/824 = 4R”. Yes, the average value of the number of execution rounds in the big hit on the second main game side is “4R × 50/824 + 16R × 774/824 = 15.3R”, so it is 2nd than the big hit on the first main game side The average value of the number of execution rounds is larger in the big hit on the main game side, that is, the expected value of the number of winning balls in the big win is larger. Further, when comparing similarly regarding probability variation big hits that will shift to the non-stochastic variable gaming state after the big hit, the average value of the number of execution rounds in the probability variation big hit on the first main game side is “4R × 200/200 = 4R”. The average value of the number of execution rounds in the big hit on the second main game side is “2R × 200/200 = 2R”, so the big hit on the second main game side than the big hit on the first main game side The average value of the number of execution rounds is smaller, that is, the expected value of the number of winning balls in the big hit is smaller. Further, of the big hits on the first main game side, the big hits that shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the big hits have ended are the big hits that shift to the time-reduced gaming state A and the big hits that shift to the time-reduced gaming state B On the other hand, among the big hits on the second main game side, the big hit that shifts to the probability varying gaming state after the big hit ends has only the big hit that shifts to the time-reduced gaming state B.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the sorting member drive control process in the subroutine of step 1800 (third) in FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the sorting member driving flag (a flag that is turned on during the period in which the sorting member is driven based on the opening of the electric accessory) is off. Determine. If YES in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the first release timing of the electric accessory (the drive of the sorting member is started from the timing of the first release of the electric accessory). Is determined). In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting an initial value (7.6 in this example) to the sorting member drive timer (decrement timer). Next, in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the sorting member driving flag, and proceeds to step 1810. In the case of No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the timing for switching the drive (timer value = 4.0) of the sorting member drive timer value (the sort member drive timer becomes a decrement timer. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the distribution member drive timer value at the timing of 3.6 seconds from the start of the distribution member drive is 4.0). In the case of Yes in step 1810, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the sorting member from the first mode to the second mode (the initial position is the first mode), and the next process { Control proceeds to step 1850 (third process). If NO in step 1810, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the sorting member drive timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the sorting member from the second mode to the first mode. Next, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the sorting member driving flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 1850 (third) process}. Even in the case of No in step 1804 or 1814, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1850 (third) process}.

  Next, the middle part of FIG. 48 is an operation diagram of the electric accessory and the distributing member. First, the sorting member C22 is driven from the first mode (initial position) to the second mode at a predetermined timing (3.6 seconds from the start of driving). Here, in the time-saving gaming state A, the electric accessory is long open during the period in which the sorting member is in the first mode (3.0 seconds, which is the first half of the above-described electric character open period) ), And it becomes easy to enter game balls. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state B, the electric member is opened for a long time in the period in which the sorting member is in the second mode (4.0 seconds, which is the latter half of the electric member opening period described above). It is configured to be easy to enter a game ball. Further, the lower part of FIG. 48 is a table showing the opening mode of the electric accessory and the displacement mode of the sorting member. As described above, in the opening pattern of the electric accessory, when the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on, the total number of open times of the electric accessory or (a plurality of pieces are released) than when the auxiliary game short flag A is on. In the case where the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on, the game ball of the game ball to the sorting entrance is relatively longer than the case where the auxiliary game short flag A is turned on. Easy to enter. Further, as described above, in the case of the first mode, the distribution member guides the game ball to enter the first opening entrance C22 (executes a lottery related to the first main game symbol), In the case of the second mode, the game ball is guided to enter the second open entrance C23 (execute a lottery related to the second main game symbol). By configuring in this way, even in one probability-variable gaming state, different gaming states such as gameability and profit rate are different depending on whether the time shortening gaming state is the time shortening gaming state A or the time shortening gaming state B. It can have more than one.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first non-electrical accessory driving control process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (third) in FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first non-electrically-powered object opening flag (the flag that is turned on while the first non-electrically-powered object A12hd is open) is off. . If Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first opening entrance C22. In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first non-electrically-powered object opening flag. Next, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first non-electrically-powered accessory A12hd, and proceeds to the next process {step 1900 (third) process}. If NO in step 1852, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined number (the number of balls that will be closed at the first main game start opening BA12). In this example, it is determined whether or not two) have entered the ball. In the case of Yes in Step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition in Step 1862 (in this example, the first non-powered accessory in the situation where the auxiliary game short time flag A is off) It is determined whether or not an error occurs when A12hd is released and the auxiliary game short time flag A is off at the timing when the result in Step 1860 is Yes. In the case of Yes in Step 1862, in Step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first non-electrical accessory A12hd. Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first non-electrically-powered object opening flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 1900 (third) process}. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1860 or step 1854, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1900 (third)). If NO in step 1862, an error is notified in step 1868 and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, turning the power off to on, executing RAM clear, Etc.) As described above, in the third embodiment, even if a game ball enters the first main game start opening BA12 in a situation where the auxiliary game short time flag A is off, it is not immediately determined that there is an error. The first non-powered accessory A12hd is opened when the auxiliary game short flag A is off, and the first non-electrical accessory A12hd is closed when the auxiliary game short flag A is off. A predetermined number of game balls (in this example, the number of game balls is two, but it is sufficient if the number of the first non-electrically-powered accessory A12hd is more than the number of balls entering from the open state to the closed state, and there is no problem with three game balls). When entering the first main game start opening BA12, an error is determined. In the third embodiment, when the auxiliary game short time flag A is on, the first non-powered accessory A12hd is opened, and after that, after one change, the auxiliary game short time flag A is off, Since the auxiliary game short flag A is turned off and the first non-electrical accessory A12hd is being opened, no error occurs in such a case. Therefore, the auxiliary game short flag A is off when the first non-electric accessory A12hd is opened, In addition, an error condition is that the auxiliary gaming time-short flag A is off even when the first non-electrical accessory A12hd is closed.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the second non-electrical accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of Step 1900 (third) in FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second non-electric-powered object opening flag (the flag that is turned on while the second non-electric-powered object B10hd is open) is off. . If YES in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the second open entrance C23. In the case of Yes in step 1904, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second non-electrically-powered object opening flag. Next, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second non-electrical accessory B10hd, and proceeds to the next process {step 1900 (third) process}. In the case of No in step 1902, in step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a predetermined number (the number of balls that will be closed by the second non-powered accessory B <b> 10 hd) in the second main game start port B <b> 10. In this example, it is determined whether or not two) have entered the ball. In the case of Yes in Step 1910, in Step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (the second non-electrical accessory B10 is opened in a situation where the auxiliary game time short flag B is off). In addition, it is determined whether or not an error occurs when the auxiliary game short time flag B is OFF at the timing when the answer is Yes in step 1910). In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second non-electrical accessory B10hd. Next, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second non-electrically-powered object opening flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Note that if the answer is No in step 1910 or step 1904, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). If NO in step 1912, an error is notified in step 1918 and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, turning the power off and on, executing RAM clear, Etc.) Thus, in the third embodiment, even if a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in a situation where the auxiliary game short time flag B is OFF, it is not immediately determined that there is an error. The second non-electrical accessory B10hd is opened when the auxiliary gaming short flag B is off, and the second non-electrical accessory B10hd is closed when the auxiliary gaming short flag B is off. A predetermined number of game balls (in this example, the number of game balls is two, but it is sufficient that the second non-electrical accessory B10hd is equal to or greater than the number of balls entered from the open state to the closed state). When entering the second main game start opening B10, an error is determined. Note that the number of balls entered as an error is the number of balls entering the first main game start port BA12 in the case of an error in the first main game start port BA12, and the second main game start in the case of an error in the second main game start port B10. It is configured to measure the error of the mouth B10 and determine the error. One ball enters the first main game start port BA12, and one ball enters the second main game start port B10 and enters two balls in total. Since it is a ball, it is not configured to determine an error. In the third embodiment, when the auxiliary game short flag B is on, the second non-electric accessory B10hd is opened, and after that, after one change, the auxiliary game short flag B is off, Since the auxiliary non-playing time short flag B is off and the second non-powered accessory B10hd is open, and in such a case, no error occurs. In addition, an error condition is that the auxiliary game time short flag B is off even when the second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd is closed.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 of FIG. 17 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 2514 (third) to step 2518 (third), that is, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes. After setting the command to be executed, in step 2514 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a probability change transition notification jackpot symbol (the game state after the end of the special game is a probability variation game). It is determined whether or not it is a big hit symbol that will be notified during the special game that it is in a state and is 3A, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2514 (third), in step 2516 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a probable transition notification effect as a big hit effect (that the gaming state after the big hit is a probability variation gaming state). The command for executing the effect) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2514 (third), that is, the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a probability change transition non-notification big hit symbol (a big hit that does not notify whether or not the special game will shift to the probability variation game state) If the symbol is 2A, 5A, 2B, 5B), in step 2518 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S generates a probable transition non-notification effect (probability of the gaming state after the big hit is over) as a big hit effect. A command for executing an effect that does not notify whether or not the game is in a variable game state is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. Thus, in the third embodiment, during the jackpot execution related to the probability change transition notification jackpot symbol, the probability change transition notification effect is executed, and after the jackpot ends, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state A or the probability While notifying that the transition to the profit-changing gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state B is in progress, the probability-changing transition non-notifying effect is executed during the jackpot execution related to the probability-changing non-notifying jackpot symbol, and the probability-gaining-changing game is performed after the jackpot is finished. It is configured not to notify whether the state shifts to the time-reduced gaming state B or the non-probability gained variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state B. In the big hit related to the probability change notification big hit symbol, it may be notified at the start of the big hit that the game shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends. In the big hit related to “7A, 7B”, it is informed that the transition to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state B after the big hit ends, and in the big hit related to “3A”, the probability-variable gaming state and time after the big hit ends. Whether the transition to the shortened gaming state A is notified, and in the jackpot relating to “2A, 5A, 2B, 5B”, only the transition to the time shortening gaming state B is notified after the jackpot is ended, and the transition to the probability variation gaming state is performed. It is configured not to notify whether or not.

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third) in FIG. First, in step 2624, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the stay stage switching timing {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing at which the special game is ended (winned), the timing at which the gaming state is shifted, Etc.} is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2624, in step 2626, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is a time-short B fixed symbol (7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “night stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2634. In the case of No in step 2626, in step 2630, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is a time-short A determined symbol (3A). In the case of Yes in step 2630, in step 2631, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2634. In the case of No in step 2630 (stopped jackpot symbols are 2A, 2B, 5A, and 5B), in step 2632, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is “chance stage” (in the probability variation gaming state) as the stay stage. Set whether or not it is a non-stochastic game state), and the process proceeds to step 2634.

  Next, in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a stage promotion command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2634 (received when the symbol variation is executed 10 times in the situation where the probability variation gaming state and the stay stage are “chance stage” after the end of the big hit), in step 2636, the sub control board S CPUSC sets “night stage” as the stay stage (shifts to “night stage” if the game is in the probability variation game state after the “chance stage”), and proceeds to the next process (step 2999). Transition. If No in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S in step 2638 indicates that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (the normal gaming state is a non-probability variation state and a non-time-shortening gaming state. ) Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2638, in step 2640, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “day stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999). Note that if the answer is No in step 2624 or 2638, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999). Thus, in the third embodiment, the stay stage when the game state is the time-reduced game state A is configured to be an “evening stage”, and the stay stage when the game state is the time-reduced game state B is It is configured to be a “night stage” or a “chance stage”, and stays depending on whether the time-reduced gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state A or the time-reduced gaming state B even in the time-reduced gaming state The stage is configured to be different. Further, the stay stage in the time-saving gaming state B is configured such that a plurality of types of stay stages of “night stage” and “chance stage” can be set. In addition, after the end of the special game related to “5A / 5B”, which is a jackpot symbol that becomes the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state B after the special game ends, and after the special game ends, the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state B The stay stage is configured to be the same “chance stage” after the end of the special game related to “2A · 2B” which is a big hit symbol. In the third embodiment, the “chance stage” sets the stay stage as an effect to the last. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When “chance stage” is set as the stay stage, the limited frequency state is set. The average value of the variation time may be relatively long, and in such a case, the probability variation gaming state is present in the relatively long variation time. It can be configured that the player can be more excited and immersed in the game during the period when the player pays attention to the player as a game by frequently asking the player whether or not.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the auxiliary game time short flag A and the auxiliary game time short flag B are provided as the auxiliary game time short flag, thereby shortening the time. The game state is configured to have two time-reduced game states, a time-reduced game state A and a time-reduced game state B. In the time-reduced game state A, the timing at which the electric game object is released for a long time (game balls are easy to enter) In the time-reduced gaming state B, the timing at which the electric accessory is released for a long time (timing at which the game ball can easily enter the ball) is the latter half. In addition, since the sorting member is in the first mode in the first half portion and the sorting member is in the second mode in the second half portion, the sorting in which the electric combination is installed in the time-saving gaming state A When a game ball enters the entrance, it enters the first open entrance, and in the time-saving game state B, the game ball enters the distribution entrance where the electric accessory is installed. In this case, the ball enters the second opening entrance, and when a game ball enters the first opening entrance, the first non-electrically-powered object installed at the first main game start opening is When a game ball enters the second opening entrance, the first non-electrically-powered object installed at the second main game start opening is opened, so that in the case of the time-saving gaming state A The game progresses by entering the first main game starting port, and in the time-saving gaming state B, the game is played by entering the second main game starting port. It is possible to create a novel game with different game characteristics depending on whether the time-reduced gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state A or the time-reduced gaming state B even in one probability-variable gaming state where It becomes.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is exemplified, but such novel gaming characteristics can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is referred to as a first modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (third variation 1) in FIG. 15 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1755 (third change 1) to step 1757 (third change 1) and step 1761 (third change 1), that is, the main game probability change flag is turned on in step 1754. After that, in step 1755 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) to the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, at step 1756 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current stop symbol is a short-time A big-hit symbol (a big-hit symbol with a relatively small number of short-time times given after the big-hit is finished) In the example, it is determined whether 2A, 3A, and 2B). In the case of Yes in step 1756 (third variation 1), in step 1757 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M stores a predetermined value A (a relatively small number of time reductions) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. In the example, 80 times) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1758. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756 (third variation 1), in other words, the current stop symbol is a short-time B big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of short-time times given after the big hit ends, in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, and 7B), in step 1761 (third variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M has a predetermined value B (a relatively large number of time reductions) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Then, 100 times) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1762. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is configured to end when a predetermined number of symbol variations are completed after the end of the jackpot (similar to the present embodiment). Depending on the jackpot symbol, the number of times the time is given after the jackpot ends can be different. In addition, the maximum value of the number of short hours given after the end of the big hit is 100 times, while the maximum value of the probability variation given after the big hit ends is 80, and the maximum value of the number of short hours is larger. It has become. In addition, the number of time savings after the big hit on the first main game side is 80 times, while the number of time savings after the big hit on the second main game side is 100, and after the big hit on the first main game side The shorter number of times is less than the number of shorter times after the big hit on the second main game side (the big number on the second main game side is a shorter number of times that is more advantageous for the player). In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, after the big hit on the first main game side, there is a case where a transition is made to the time-reduced gaming state A and a case where a transition is made to the time-reduced gaming state B, while the second You may comprise so that it may transfer only to the time reduction game state B after the end of the big hit on the main game side. In addition, when the first main game side wins a big hit in the time reduction game state A, the number of time reductions after the big win ends is relatively small, but in the case of a big win in the time reduction game state B May be configured such that the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot is relatively large. In addition, when the second main game side wins a big hit in the time reduction game state A or wins a big hit in the time reduction game state B, the number of time reductions after the big hit ends is relatively large. You may comprise.

Further, in the third embodiment and the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the probability variation number and the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit may be configured as follows.
(1) After all the big hits are completed, the probability variation number is set to 80, and the number of time reductions is set to a predetermined value A = 80 and a predetermined value B = 100.
(2) After all the big hits, the probability variation number is set to 80, and the number of time reductions is set to a predetermined value A = 60 and a predetermined value B = 80.
(3) After all the big hits are finished, the number of probability changes is set to 80, and the number of time reductions is set to a predetermined value A = 60 and a predetermined value B = 100.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modified example from the third embodiment, the probability variation gaming state can be terminated by a predetermined number of symbol variations after the special game is completed. In the case of the time shortening game state A, the number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions are set to the same value. By configuring so as to be, it becomes possible to realize a more playable game.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is exemplified, but such novel gaming characteristics can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-saving gaming states is referred to as a second modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (third) in FIG. 15 in Modification 2 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 1786-1 (third modification 2) to step 1786-4 (third modification 2), step 1757 (third modification 2) and step 1761 (third modification 2). Yes, that is, in step 1786-1 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2. Next, in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 has reached a specified value (4 in this example). To do. In the case of Yes in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), in step 1786-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1786-4 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current stop symbol is a short-time A big hit symbol (the auxiliary game short-time flag when shifting to the non-stochastic variable gaming state after the big hit is over) It is determined whether or not A is a jackpot symbol that is turned on, and in this example, 3A · 2B). In the case of Yes in step 1786-4 (third variation 2), in step 1757 (third variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M has a predetermined value A (a relatively small number of time reductions) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. In this example, 80 times) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1758.

  In addition, in step 1760, the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol in which the short game B flag is turned on (the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on when the game shifts to the non-stochastic variable gaming state after the jackpot ends. 7B), or after the main game probability change flag is turned on in step 1754, in step 1761 (third change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (relative to the short time counter MP52c). In this example, 100 times) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1762. If NO in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1754. If NO in step 1786-4 (third modification 2), the process proceeds to step 1760. As described above, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the limiter machine is used as in the second embodiment, and the jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state is a predetermined number of times (reach the limiter). After the predetermined number of jackpots, the game will shift to a non-stochastic game state. However, depending on the jackpot symbol related to the predetermined number of jackpots, (1) the game will shift to a time-saving gaming state and (80), (2) Transition to a time-reduced gaming state, and the number of time reductions is relatively large (100), and (3) Non-time-reduced gaming state. It is configured. In addition, when the limiter is reached and the time reduction gaming state is reached after the big hit, the average value of the time reduction times (or when the time reduction gaming state does not become the time reduction gaming state, the number of time reductions related to all jackpots calculated by setting the time reduction number to 0 is used. The average value) is greater after the jackpot on the second main game side than after the jackpot on the first main game side. It should be noted that even when the probability variation continuous counter value has not reached the specified value, that is, in the case of No in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the auxiliary game time short flag A may be configured to be turned on. Specifically, when the big hit whose positive variation continuous counter value does not become the specified value after the big hit ends is a big hit on the first main game side, the gaming state after the big hit ends is “time reduction gaming state A: time reduction. In the case where the big hit where the probability variation continuous counter value does not become the specified value after the big hit ends is a big hit on the second main game side after the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit ends It is configured to shift at a ratio of “time reduction game state A: time reduction game state B = 1: 9”, and the big hit where the probability variation continuous counter value becomes the specified value after the big hit ends is the big hit on the first main game side In that case, The game state after the end transitions at a ratio of “time reduction game state A: time reduction game state B = 5: 1”, and the big hit where the probability variation continuous counter value becomes the specified value after the big hit ends is the big hit on the second main game side If it is, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot may be configured to shift to a gaming state B that is reduced by 100% time. Such a configuration is advantageous to the player even after the probability variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value by shifting to the time-saving gaming state B until the probability variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value ( A gaming state that is advantageous compared to the time-reduced gaming state A) can be created, and the gameability of how the probability variation continuous counter value can be shifted to the time-reduced gaming state B by the time it reaches the specified value is created. Will be able to.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the third embodiment, when the winning jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of jackpot ends. Even if it is configured to shift to the non-stochastic game state and the time reduction game state later, the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the non-time By configuring so that the game state to be shifted to the shortened game state is different, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine in which the number of acquired game balls differs depending on the timing of winning the player's jackpot symbol it can.

  In the second modification from the third embodiment, after the big hit on the first main game side, there are a case where a transition to the time reduction game state A and a case where a transition to the time reduction game state B occurs, You may comprise so that it may transfer only to the time reduction game state B after the end of the big hit on the main game side. In addition, when the first main game side wins a big hit in the time reduction game state A, the number of time reductions after the big win ends is relatively small, but in the case of a big win in the time reduction game state B May be configured such that the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot is relatively large. In addition, when the second main game side wins a big hit in the time reduction game state A or wins a big hit in the time reduction game state B, the number of time reductions after the big hit ends is relatively large. You may comprise.

(Modification 3 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is exemplified, but such novel gaming characteristics can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-saving gaming states is referred to as a third modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 10 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 3050 (third variation 3). That is, after the hold information is shifted in step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M is changed in step 3050 (third variation 3). Then, the falling lottery execution process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 1408.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution process according to the subroutine of Step 3050 (third modification 3) in FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. First, in step 3052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUMC of the main control board M wins the falling lottery (whether to shift from the probability variation gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state) with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/50). (No lottery). Next, in step 3056, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the falling lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 3056, in step 3058, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1408). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1408) also in the case of No in step 3052 or step 3056.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment, the falling lottery is executed for each symbol variation in the probability variation gaming state, and the falling lottery is performed. If the winning game is configured to shift to the non-stochastic variable gaming state, the profit rate in the probability varying gaming state differs depending on which auxiliary gaming short time flag is on in a gaming machine having a plurality of auxiliary gaming short time flags. At the same time, it is possible to obtain a highly interesting gaming machine by checking for each symbol variation whether or not the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player is ended.

  Note that in the third modification from the third embodiment, the number of time reductions guaranteed after the end of the big hit may be different depending on the big hit symbol, and in such a case, the second main game side big hit You may comprise so that the average value of the number of time shortening guaranteed after the end may be increased rather than after the big hit end of the first main game side. Here, the term “guaranteed” means that even if the probability variation gaming state is shifted to the non-stochastic variation gaming state by winning the falling lottery, the time shortening game until the guaranteed time variation of the symbol variation is completed. Specifically, it is definite that the state will continue. Specifically, (1) the number of times the first main game is guaranteed is 50 times and the second main game is guaranteed. The number of time savings is 100 times. (2) When the number of time savings that can be guaranteed is 50 times and 100 times, after the big hit on the second main game side is over after the big hit on the first main game side is over. Also, it may be configured such that 100 times can be easily selected. Further, even when the number of fluctuations after the big hit exceeds the guaranteed number, if the probability variation gaming state continues (when it does not fall), the time shortening gaming state is also continued. In addition, when the winning lottery is won after that, the time-reduced gaming state is also ended, but the timing when the time-reducing gaming state ends is (1) at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol variation won in the falling lottery. (2) When the variation of the symbol variation won in the falling lottery ends, (3) When the variation of the next variation of the symbol variation won in the falling lottery starts. Further, it may not be configured to guarantee the number of time reductions, and a jackpot may be provided in which the time-reduced gaming state ends when the symbol variation ends at a fixed number (for example, 50 times). In addition, the above-described configuration may be combined. Specifically, a jackpot symbol in which the number of times shortened is fixed 50 times, a jackpot symbol in which the number of times shortened is guaranteed 50 times, and a number of times the number of times shortened is guaranteed 100 You may provide the big hit symbol which becomes times. In such a configuration, after the big hit on the second main game side, the order of easy selection is “guaranteed 100 times of time reduction → 50 times of time reduction → fixed 50 times of time reduction”, and the first main game After the big hit on the side, it may be configured such that “the fixed number of times 50 is fixed → the guaranteed number of times 50 is shortened → the guaranteed number of times 100 is shortened” in order of easy selection.

(Modification 4 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is exemplified, but such novel gaming characteristics can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-saving gaming states is referred to as a fourth modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are that there are two big prize openings, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening C20 is entered during special games. By having this, it has the specific area C22 in which the right to transition to the probability variation gaming state can be obtained.

  Next, FIG. 58 is an example of a main game table in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. In the gaming machine according to the modified example 4 from the third embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round in the special game execution (the second grand prize opening C20 will be opened). By doing so, it is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished (so-called tamakoku machine). In addition, as an opening mode of the second big prize opening C20 in the distribution game execution round, a long opening that allows a game ball to easily enter the specific area C22, and a short opening that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the specific area C22, The big hit that becomes the long opening is the long opening big hit, and the big hit that becomes the short opening is the short opening big hit. As types of big hits, "2A · 2B" is a 4R short open big hit, "3A · 5A · 5B" is a 4R long open big hit, and "7A · 7B" is a 16R long open big hit, from the first main game side In the second main game side, the ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit is higher.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1600 in FIG. 6 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 1711 (third variation 4) and step 3100 (third variation 4), that is, after setting a special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1708, Alternatively, if the special game execution flag is ON in step 1710, in step 1711 (third variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current round is the distribution game execution round (in this example, the second R). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1711 (third variation 4), in step 3100 (third variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1734.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of Step 3100 (third variation 4) in FIG. 59 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big prize opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a big hit symbol that is open for time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a long open pattern (for example, 15 seconds open) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. , An opening pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific area C22 is substantially deterministic) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 3110. In the case of No in step 3104, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. (For example, an opening pattern designed to be 0.1 second opening and non-entering the specific area C22 to be substantially definite) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3110. In the second embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is “5A / 7A”, and the ratio selected at the time of the big hit is “324/1024”. The long open symbol on the side is “5B / 7B”, and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is “824/1024”, so the big hit on the second main game side than the big hit on the first main game side In the sorting game execution round, the ratio of the second big prize opening C20 being long open is high, that is, the game ball is configured to easily enter the specific area C22 at the time of big hit. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by the completion of the symbol variation for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot end as described above, the jackpot on the second main game side In addition, although not shown in the figure, among the long open big hits, the big hit when the auxiliary game short flag A is turned on after the big hit ends and the auxiliary game short flag B are turned on. The big hit when the auxiliary game short flag B, which is advantageous for the player, is turned on, has a higher ratio of the long open big hit on the second main game side than the long open big hit on the first main game side. It has become.

  Next, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 3116.

  Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. . If Yes in step 3116, the process proceeds to step 3120. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3116, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 3118, the process proceeds to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 3124, in step 3126, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag, and proceeds to step 3128. In the case of No in step 3124, the process proceeds to step 3128. Next, in step 3128, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1734). In the case of No in step 3118, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1734).

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment, the special winning area has a specific area, and the game ball enters the specific area during the big hit. Even in gaming machines that transition to a probability-variable gaming state after the big hit, a big hit that is easy to enter a specific area and a big hit that is difficult to enter a specific area are provided. However, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state by having a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving gaming state A after the jackpot ends and a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving gaming state B after the jackpot ends. It is possible to create a novel gameability that pays attention to the two factors of whether the state A or the time-reduced game state B is shifted to.

  In addition, in the modified example 4 from the third embodiment, when the jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state described above continues for a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the non-probability variation gaming state after completion of the predetermined number of jackpots. It may be a machine (so-called limiter machine), or may be a gaming machine (so-called falling lottery machine) that executes a lottery to shift to a non-stochastic variable game state every time in a probability variable game state.

A configuration example applicable to the fourth modification from the third embodiment will be exemplified below.
(1) The expected value of the number of winning balls in the jackpot on the second main game side is larger than the expected value of the number of winning balls in the jackpot on the first main game side.
(2) The ratio of long-open big hits (big hits that are easy to enter a specific area in the distribution game execution round) in the big hit on the second main game side is higher than the ratio of long-open big hits on the first main game side big hit .
(3) The variation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit ends differs depending on whether or not the specific area is entered during the big hit.
(4) The transition pattern of the variation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit ends differs depending on whether or not the specific area is entered during the big hit (for example, big hit A: 20 fluctuation table 1 → 30 fluctuation table 2, big hit B: 50 Variation table 3).
(5) Depending on whether or not a specific area is entered during a big hit, whether or not the game enters a probability-variable gaming state after the big hit ends.
(6) Regardless of whether or not a specific area is entered during the big hit, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state after the big hit.
(7) The stay stage after the big hit is different depending on whether or not the specific area is entered during the big hit.
(8) The variation tendency of the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state after the big hit is different depending on whether or not to enter the specific area during the big hit (average value of the variation time, production mode, the shortest variation time that can be selected) ).
(9) A game machine in which the probability variation gaming state can be ended depending on the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit (so-called ST machine), and after the big hit on the second main game side, it always shifts to the probability variable gaming state. (You may provide a case where the game does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit on the first main game side).
(10) The game machine is configured such that the probability variation gaming state does not end depending on the number of symbol variations since the end of the jackpot, and the probability variation gaming state is maintained after the first main game side jackpot ends and after the second main game side jackpot ends. There is a case where the transition is made and a case where the transition is not made (the transition after the jackpot on the second main game side is easier to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot than the end of the jackpot on the first main game side, that is, the second The big hit on the main game side is more likely to be a big hit that makes it easier to enter a specific area in the sorting game execution round during the big hit than the big hit on the first main game side).
In addition, since the above configuration is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit is finished by entering a specific area in the distribution game execution round during the jackpot, the transition to the probability variation gaming state is made. = Enter the specific area during the big hit, do not shift to the probability variation gaming state = Do not enter the specific area during the big hit.

(Modification 5 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is exemplified, but such novel gaming characteristics can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is referred to as a fifth modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 61 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 from the third embodiment. In the fourth modification from the third embodiment, the first main game start port AA10 and the first main game start port BA12 are provided as the first main game start port, and flow down the left side of the game area. The game ball is configured to be easy to enter the first main game start port AA10 and to be difficult to enter the first main game start port BA12. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the ball and it is easy to enter the first main game start opening BA12 (when the second non-electrical accessory B11hd is open). In addition, since the first main game start opening BA12 is blocked by the second non-electrical accessory B11hd, it is difficult for the game ball to enter unless the second non-electrical accessory B11hd is in an open state. Here, the start winning opening corresponding to the first main game is configured so that the common winning / losing lottery, symbol lottery, etc. are executed no matter which game ball enters, so substantially, It is supplemented that the game content is not different no matter which game ball enters.

  Next, a distribution start port unit C50 is provided below the game area (based on the center point of the game area). The details of the distribution start port unit C50 will be described later. As shown in the drawing, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided with a first main game start port AA10 and a second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down the game area is easily guided to one of the first main game start port AA10 and the second main game start port B10.

  Next, FIG. 62 is an overall view and an operation diagram of the sorting start unit C50. First, the distribution start unit C50 is provided with a common entrance C51 into which a game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game that is provided below the common entrance C51 and flows down from the common entrance C51. A starting port distributing member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left and right directions around the support shaft) and a starting port distributing member C50y are provided below the ball to distribute the balls regularly in the left and right direction. The first main game start port AA10, the second main game start port B10 provided below the start port distribution member C50y, and the distribution start port unit provided below the start port distribution member C50y. A discharge opening that allows the game balls in C50 to be discharged out of the distribution start opening unit C50 without entering the first main game start opening AA10 and the second main game start opening B10. The distribution start port unit C50 configured in this way is configured to tilt the game balls that have flowed into the common entrance C51 into the left and right directions of the start port distribution member C50y, as indicated by the dotted line in the figure. Is configured to be guided to one of the first main game start port AA10 and the second main game start port B10. For example, the case where the start port distributing member C50y is tilting in the left direction is referred to as “first position”, and the case where the start port distributing member C50y is tilting in the right direction is referred to as “second position”. When the position is "position", the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 in a situation where the start opening distribution member C50y is "second position" is guided to the first main game start AA10 side, In the situation where the start opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the “first position” and the start opening distribution member C50y is the “first position”, the game balls flowing into the common entrance C51 are the second main While being guided to the game start port B10 side, the start port distribution member C50y is displaced to the “second position”. In this example, the tilting operation in the left-right direction of the start opening distributing member C50y is performed by the weight of the game ball. As a result, on the mechanism, the game ball flowing into the common entrance C51 is , Game balls are alternately distributed to either one of the first main game start port AA10 and the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball to either one, 1 to the other It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls.

In addition, when it is set as the structure which has the distribution start opening unit C50,
(1) The game machine is configured so that the probability variation gaming state can be ended by the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit (so-called ST machine), and the second main game side after the big hit on the first main game side The number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit is relatively greater than after the big hit, and the expected value of winning the winning ball on the first main game side is smaller than the expected winning value of the winning ball on the second main game side.
(2) The game machine is configured so that the probability variation gaming state can be ended by the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit (so-called ST machine), and after the big hit on the first main game side, the second main game side The number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit is relatively smaller than after the big hit, and the expected value of winning the winning ball on the first main game side is larger than the expected winning value of the winning ball on the second main game side.
(3) When the jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined number of times, the gaming machine is configured to shift to the non-probability variation gaming state after the predetermined number of jackpots ends (so-called limiter machine). The number of time reductions when the main game side shifts to the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state after the big hit ends is relatively higher after the big hit ends on the second main game side The expected value of winning the winning ball on the game side jackpot is less than the expected winning value of the winning ball on the second main game side.
(4) When the jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined number of times, the gaming machine is configured to shift to the non-stochastic variation gaming state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpots (so-called limiter machine). The number of time reductions when the main game side shifts to the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state after the big hit ends is relatively less after the big hit end on the second main game side, and the first main The expected value of winning the winning ball on the game side jackpot is greater than the expected value of winning the winning ball on the second main game side.
(5) A gaming machine that executes a lottery for shifting to a non-stochastic variable gaming state every time in a probability varying gaming state (a so-called falling lottery machine), and the second after the jackpot on the first main game side ends The number of fluctuations that are guaranteed to be a time-reduced gaming state after the end of the big hit is relatively higher than after the end of the big hit on the main game side, and the expected value for winning the winning ball in the big win on the first main game side is the second main game Less than the expected value of winning a prize ball on the side's jackpot.
(6) A gaming machine that executes a lottery for shifting to a non-probabilistic variable gaming state every time in a stochastic variable gaming state (so-called falling lottery machine), and the second after the jackpot on the first main game side ends The number of fluctuations that are guaranteed to be in a reduced time gaming state after the end of the big hit is relatively less than after the big hit on the main game side, and the expected value for winning the winning ball on the first main game side is the second main game More than the expected value of winning a prize ball at the jackpot on the side.
(7) A game ball that enters a specific area within the big prize in the distributed game execution round during the big hit is configured to be a gaming machine that can shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the big hit (the so-called ball). ), After the big hit on the first main game side is over, after the big hit on the second main game side is over, the open mode of the big prize opening in the sorting game execution round is longer open (relatively the game ball is The ratio of the big hit that is easy to enter the ball) is high (the percentage of the long open big hit is high), and the expected value of winning the winning ball on the first main game side is the winning ball on the second main game side Less than expected value.
(8) When a game ball enters a specific area within the big prize in the distributed game execution round during the big hit, the game machine is configured to be able to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the big hit (the so-called ball). ), After the big hit on the first main game side is over, after the big hit on the second main game side is over, the open mode of the big prize opening in the sorting game execution round is longer open (relatively the game ball is The ratio of the big hit that is easy to enter the ball) is low (the percentage of the long open big hit is low), and the expected value for winning the winning ball on the first main game side is the winning ball on the second main game side More than expected value.
(9) When a game ball enters a specific area in the big prize in the distributed game execution round during the big hit, the game machine is configured to be able to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the big hit (the so-called ball). ), After the big hit on the first main game side is over, after the big hit on the second main game side is over, the open mode of the big prize opening in the sorting game execution round is longer open (relatively the game ball is The ratio of the big hit that is easy to enter) is higher (the ratio of the long open big hit is higher), and after the big hit on the first main game side is shorter than after the big hit on the second main game side The number of times is relatively small.
(10) A game ball that enters a specific area within the big prize in the distributed game execution round during the big hit is configured to be a gaming machine that can shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the big hit (the so-called ball). ), After the big hit on the first main game side is over, after the big hit on the second main game side is over, the open mode of the big prize opening in the sorting game execution round is longer open (relatively the game ball is The ratio of big hits that are easy to enter) is low (the percentage of long open big hits is low), and after the big hit on the first main game side is shorter than after the big hit on the second main game side The number of times is relatively large.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to Step 1300 in FIG. 3 in Modification 5 from the third embodiment. First, the changes from the third embodiment are step 1302 (third modification 5), step 1303 (third modification 5), step 1307 (third modification 5), step 1309 (third modification 5), step 1317 ( About the third variation 5) and step 1319 (third variation 5), that is, in step 1302 (third variation 5), whether the CPUMC of the main control board M has won the first main game start port AA10 Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1302 (third variation 5), the process proceeds to step 1304. If No, in step 1303 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the first main game start port BA12. It is determined whether or not there has been a prize. If Yes in step 1303 (third variation 5), the process proceeds to step 1304. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Further, after obtaining the first main game content determination random number in step 1306, in step 1307 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side. With reference, the current total number of reserved items is acquired, and “total number of reserved items + 1” is derived as the winning order of new winnings. Next, in step 1309 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the acquired first main game content determination random number and the derived winning order in the RAM area of the main control board M as hold information. Store, and the process proceeds to step 1310.

  Further, after acquiring the second main game content determination random number in step 1316, in step 1317 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side. With reference, the current total number of reserved items is acquired, and “total number of reserved items + 1” is derived as the winning order of new winnings. Next, in step 1319 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the acquired second main game content determination random number and the derived winning order in the RAM area of the main control board M as hold information. Store, and the process proceeds to step 1320.

  As described above, in the fifth modification from the third embodiment, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided, and when the game is advanced by executing the left-handed in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state, Since the hold on the first main game side (maximum 4 pieces) and the hold on the second main game side (up to 4 pieces) can occur alternately, it is configured so that a maximum of 8 holds can be accumulated.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to Step 1400 in Modification 5 from the third embodiment. First, the change from the third embodiment is about step 1402 (third variation 5), and the purpose is to realize the winning order digestion of the main game hold. That is, when executing the processing of the subroutine, in step 1402 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first winning order It is determined whether or not the hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 1402 (third variation 5), processing related to the variation of the first main game symbol is executed in step 1400 (1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1402 (third variation 5), in step 1400 (2), processing related to the variation of the second main game symbol is executed.

  As described above, in the fifth modified example from the third embodiment, the reservation is executed according to the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second main game symbol (first main game symbol) is not limited thereto. Of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) regardless of the presence of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol). The first one may be configured to prioritize the reservation of the second main game symbol (first main game symbol), or a parallel lottery that draws both main game symbols simultaneously in parallel. It may be configured to execute.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to Steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 64 in Modification 5 from the third embodiment. First, the change from the third embodiment is about step 1404 (third variation 5), and the purpose is to appropriately update the winning order of the remaining suspension every time the main game suspension is completed. is there. That is, when the change start condition is satisfied in step 1403, in step 1404 (third change 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains hold information on the first main game side (hold information on the second main game side). The information is read and deleted from the hold information, the remaining hold information is shifted, and the winning order of each hold is decremented by 1 (hereinafter, processing related to main game variation is executed).

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 from the third embodiment, the left-handed game is executed in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state, and the game proceeds. In this case, the game balls that have entered the distribution start port unit C50 are alternately distributed to the first main game start port and the second main game start port, and the first main game side is a big hit or the second main game. It is possible to realize a gameability in which the profit rate of the player varies depending on whether the player wins the game. In addition, when the game is advanced by executing a right-handed game in the probability-variable gaming state or the time-reduced gaming state, the second non-electric actor is released to release the second main game starting port in the sorting starting port unit C50. By configuring so that the game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to provide a novel game machine having the same configuration as the third embodiment and the distribution start port unit C50.

  In addition, the configuration having the distribution start port unit C50 as in Modification 5 from the third embodiment may be applied to any configuration of Modification 4 from the present embodiment to the third embodiment described above. .

In the gaming machine according to this example, the following configuration may be applied.
(1) Parallel lottery can be executed.
(2) The second main game side has a small hit, or the second main game side has a small win rate higher than the first main game side's small win rate (3) Second main game symbol The variation time is a relatively short time (for example, the average value is 3 seconds) in the probability variation gaming state, and a relatively long time (for example, the average value is 300 seconds) in the other gaming states.
(4) The expected value of the winning ball excluding the big hit or the expected value of the winning ball based on the small hit is the highest in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state among all the gaming states. (5) By winning the small hit It is possible to shift from the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.
(6) The second main game side has a small hit, and the time-saving gaming state B has better fluctuation efficiency than the time-reduced gaming state A (the average value of the fluctuation time is short) and the time is shortened By making a right turn in the gaming state B, the small hits are frequently won.

Moreover, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 5 from the third embodiment to the third embodiment, the following configuration may be applied.
(1) It has a first main game side and a second main game side, and when there is a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side, the second main game side Digest prior to holding.
(2) In the non-time-reduced gaming state, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the first main game side can be executed, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the second main game side cannot be executed.
(3) In the time shortening game state A, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the first main game side can be executed, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the second main game side cannot be executed.
(4) In the time shortening game state B, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the first main game side is not executable, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the second main game side is executable.

M main control board,
MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 first main game timer, MP11t-C2 second main game timer MP22t-B second main game Start-up motor accessory release timer, MP33c winning ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP51c probability variation counter MP52c hour / count counter, MN52c limited frequency counter MP41t small hit game timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer A 1st main game periphery Equipment A10 First main game start port (first main game start port A), A11s First main game start port entrance detection device A20 First main game symbol display device, A21g First main game symbol display unit A21h First main Game symbol hold display section, B second main game peripheral device B10 second main game start port, B11s second main Technique start entrance ball detection device B11d Second main game start opening electric accessory, B20 second main game symbol display device B21g Second main game symbol display section, B21h Second main game symbol hold display section C first and second Main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st grand prize opening C11s 1st grand prize opening prize detection device, C11d 1st big prize opening electrical equipment C20 2nd big prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd Grand prize opening electric accessory, C22 specific area C23 2nd big prize exit discharge port, C23s 2nd big prize exit discharge detection device C24 upper shielding member, C25 lower shielding member C27 V prize opening, C27s V prize opening entrance detection device C20-1 Box-shaped member H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary Technical symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM21t design variation time management timer, SM26c look-ahead effect execution counter SM23c stay stage management counter, SM23c2 consecutive resort count counter SM24t power-on timer SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display Area, SG12 first hold display portion SG13 second hold display portion, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection device, KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, MT10 command transmission buffer MP51c-2 probability variation continuous counter MN52c-1 limited frequency counter A
MN52c-2 limited frequency counter B, A12 first main game start B
A12hd 1st non-electric accessory, B10hd 2nd non-electric accessory D10d Electric accessory, C20 Sorting entrance C22 First opening entrance, C23 2nd opening entrance C22s First opening entrance entrance Detection device, C23s second opening entrance entrance entrance detection device C24 sorting member, C50 sorting start port unit C51 common entrance port, C50y start entrance sorting member

Claims (1)

The first main game start opening where game balls can enter,
A second main game start opening where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary game start opening where game balls can enter,
Distribution entrance where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the first main game start opening and displaceable in an open state and a closed state. A variable member A that is easy to enter and is configured so that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the first main game start port when it is displaced to the closed state,
A variable member attached to the second main game starting port and displaceable in an open state and a closed state. The variable member B is configured to be easy to enter and configured so that the game ball cannot enter the second main game start port when it is displaced to the closed state or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable member that is attached to the distribution entrance ball and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced in the open state, a game ball can enter the distribution entrance ball entrance as compared with a closed state. A variable member C that is easy to enter and is configured so that a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the distribution entrance when it is displaced to the closed state,
A first entrance that is provided downstream of the distribution entrance, and a entrance that allows game balls to enter;
A second entrance that is provided downstream of the distribution entrance, and a entrance that allows game balls to enter;
A member that changes the flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance to either the first opening or the second opening, and when the game ball is displaced to the first mode, A sorting member configured such that the ball is easy to enter and the game ball can easily enter the second opening when the ball is displaced to the second mode;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
With an auxiliary game part that supports the main game,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first main game starting port;
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the first main game identification information. One main game identification information display control means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game start opening;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two-main game identification information display control means;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is variable until there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening or until a predetermined period elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make the winning opening advantageous to the player;
The variable member A is configured to be in an open state by entering the first opening,
The variable member B is configured to be in an open state by entering the second opening,
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port,
Auxiliary game identification information display control for controlling whether or not to execute the determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and to display the display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit. Means,
If the determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is winning, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C is closed within the displacement drive period during which the variable member C can be displaced. An easy-to-enter game determination execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that performs the operation of displacing the closed state one or more times after being displaced from the open state to the open state;
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member C is more likely to be open than the normal gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state have a second specific game state in which the displacement mode of the variable member C can be different when an easy-to-enter ball game is executed. ,
The distribution member is configured to be able to be displaced when the easy-to-play game is executed,
When the easy-to-play game is executed, the sorting member is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
Expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed when the information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is different from the expected value.
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game and is in the first specific game state, a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in the second specific game state after the end of the special game, At least,
The ratio of the second main game identification information to the predetermined group after the end of the special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information to the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different.
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and when the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed, the second specified The ratio of the game state is determined by the high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be smaller than a proportion of being in the second specific gaming state.

Images